(logo)
(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Open Source Books | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections

Search: Advanced Search

Anonymous User (login or join us)Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Human Nature"

(5<OU_164467 > 

co 



OUP 786-13-6-75-10,000. 

OSMANIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 

Call No. V^ 2 - 1 & G ?- H Accession No. jfc. I V V 

Author V3<ndUl9UA. K\>xt 

\'l - ^ -- ' \ 
Title J^-"Uvv v (>Ar*^xIu/><i . 

This book should be returned on *r before the date last marked below. 



THE WILLIAM JAMES LECTURES 

DELIVERED AT HARVARD UNIVERSITY 

1938-1939 



HUMAN NATURE 

IN THE LIGHT OF PSYCHOPATHOLOGY 



BY 

KURT GOLDSTEIN 




CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS 
HARVARD UNIVERSITY PRESS 

1951 



COPYRIGHT, 1940 
BY THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE 

THIRD PRINTING 



Distributed in Great Britain by 

CLOFFRhY CUMBERLEGK 

OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRKSS 

LONDON 



PRINThI) IN 1HK UNITKD STAIKb OF AMKRK'A 



To 
EVA R.-G. 



Was kann ich wissen? 
Was soil ich tun? 
Was darf ich hoffen? 
Was ist der Mensch? 

KANT 



PREFACE 

MEDICAL experience in the past ten years has pointed 
very clearly to the fact that disease cannot be conn 
sidered simply a localized disturbance in the function 
of circumscribed parts of the organism. More and 
more evidence of the involvement of the entire organ- 
ism has been found, and most physicians are now 
well aware of the importance of changes of person- 
ality to be found in sick people. Through my own 
experience with patients with brain injuries I have 
come to see that not merely therapy but diagnosis as 
well demands a preliminary consideration of the 
patient's personality and the changes in it as a result 
of disease. The readjustment required by those who 
have brain diseases, which must be set in motion by 
the therapist, is possible only on the basis of a study 
of the afflicted individual as a whole. But this study 
cannot be limited to the individual proper. The 
individual has to live in and adapt himself to a milieu 
constituted by other human beings. In consequence, 
even in pathology, one is forced to reflect upon the 
fundamentals of social relationship. This means, in 
principle, that the problem of human nature has to 
enter the scope of the physician and that the thought- 
ful doctor can scarcely avoid drawing conclusions 
concerning the nature of man. The invitation to 
deliver the William James Lectures in 1938-39 gave 



viii PREFACE 

me a welcome opportunity to survey anew the much- 
scattered data on this subject, bring them together, 
and find for them a more systematic evaluation. This 
book is the outcome of those lectures. In another 
book of mine, The Organism, I endeavored to de- 
velop the basic methodology for studying organismic 
behavior, and there I made use of facts drawn from 
my experience chiefly as illustrations of the method 
proposed. Here, however, what I am striving for is 
a systematic interpretation of all these facts with 
reference to a conception of the nature of man. 

The publication of these lectures permits me to 
express once more my deep appreciation and grati- 
tude for the honor and privilege which the Division 
of Philosophy and Psychology at Harvard Univer- 
sity bestowed upon me in inviting me to deliver 
them. The hospitality and friendship with which 
the Department of Psychology received me made 
the time I spent in Emerson Hall an unforgettable 
one, especially to be cherished in these times of 
intolerance and disintegration. 

I should like to thank Miss Bella Sack for her 
careful typing of the manuscript, the Harvard Uni- 
versity Press for the care and thought given to 
improving the English and making it more readable, 
and my co-worker, Dr. Martin Scheerer, for his 
untiring assistance to me in the elaboration of the 
lectures. 

K. G. 

JANUARY, 1940 



CONTENTS 

I. THE HOLISTIC APPROACH AND THE AN- 
ALYTIC METHOD IN SCIENCE ... 3 

William James and the modern approach. The 
increasing interest in the problem of the nature 
of man. The holistic approach. The nervous 
system and its functioning. "Isolation" in ex- 
periment and in pathology. The problem of 
cognition in biology. 

II. PATHOLOGY AND THE NATURE OF MAN . 34 

The abstract attitude in patients with lesions of 
the brain cortex. 

III. THE ABSTRACT ATTITUDE AND SPEECH . 69 

Amnesic aphasia and the problem of the meaning 
of words. 

IV. ORDERED AND CATASTROPHIC BEHAVIOR! 

ANXIETY AND FEAR 85 

V. COMING TO TERMS WITH THE WORLD . I2O 

Adaptation of abnormal persons to defects. Or- 
dered and disordered behavior. The catastrophic 
situation and the phenomenon of anxiety. Pro- 
tection against catastrophic situations. The en- 
suing shrinkage of the world of the abnormal 
person. The role of anxiety in normal life. 

VI. ON THE MOTIVES ACTUATING HUMAN 

BEHAVIOR ISO 

Reflexes, instincts, drives. Psychoanalysis and 
the holistic approach. Consciousness and non- 
conscious phenomena. 



x CONTENTS 

VII. ON THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY . 

Preferred performances: the constants of person- 
ality. Personality, experience, and milieu. 

VIII. THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS . . . 2OI 

Self-actualization, self-restriction, and aggres- 
sion The individual and the "we." The indi- 
vidual and society. Habits, customs, institutions. 
Pseudo-social organization and the sickness of 
society. 

IX. THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION 77 IN SOCIAL 

PHILOSOPHY 224 

Effect of hypostatization of an isolated trait of 
human nature. Skepticism, hedonism, egoism. 
The biologist and the physical scientist. The 
physician and the educator. The holistic ap- 
proach and civilization. 

NOTES 241 

INDEX 251 



HUMAN NATURE 

IN THE LIGHT OF PSYCHOPATHOLOGY 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH AND THE 
ANALYTIC METHOD IN SCIENCE 

PERHAPS the most distinctive feature of the nine- 
teenth century is the amazing increase during that 
period of detailed scientific knowledge in various 
fields, acquired through an admirable use of what 
we may call the "atomistic" method.* The accumu- 
lation of so many thousands of facts brought an im- 
mense enrichment and refinement into the organiza- 
tion of the world, and in many ways made life easier, 
but it was followed by appalling complications in 
human existence. Along with the immense speciali- 
zation of the sciences there occurred a marked dis- 
integration of the life of the individual. Increasing 
rationalization and systematization produced a cha- 
otic state which forced the human being into an 
existence that became more and more unsuited to his 
nature. The high development of science and tech- 
nology was, of course, only the expression of a certain 
stage of cultural and economic development, but it 
was a very characteristic expression and in its turn 

* This term is intended to designate any method which uses a 
dissecting procedure* and tries to derive laws from the parts studied. 
The term "atomistic" will be used interchangeably with "analytic" 
and "dissecting." 



4 HUMAN NATURE 

exerted a strong influence on cultural and economic 
conditions. 

Among those who early recognized the fatal con- 
sequences of the scientific approach to human living 
was William James, and his entire thinking was 
directed toward finding a more satisfactory basis for 
the conduct of life. Throughout his philosophical 
work the question of the relation between life and 
knowledge was fundamental. Concerning the an- 
swer, he had no doubt. Knowledge for him had 
meaning only if a better practical life could be based 
upon it./ That he considered mind as something that 
has use and that can be defined only from this point 
of view is very characteristic of his approach to 
thinking. 

From such a point of view, he analyzed the process 
of knowledge and came to stress the importance of 
"belief," in addition to scientific reasoning, as a 
special source from which truth may arise. As Ralph 
Barton Perry has clearly shown in his book, In the 
Spirit of William James (New Haven, 1938), James 
realized that scientific knowledge is based ulti- 
mately on some creed, a creed which is the more 
significant because it eventually provides the basis 
upon which all action can be predicated. And the 
rationale of practical action was, for James, the 
final goal of 'knowledge. 

This is not the place to evaluate the conclusions 
James drew from his appraisal of belief. We cer- 
tainlv cannot follow him in all his inferences as. 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 5 

for example, when he was induced to give a special 
account of the phenomena of what is called psychic 
research. We must pay homage, however, to the 
fact that he tried both to sefluiowledge free and to 
free human existence from the strait-jacket of merely 
analyzing, anatomizing, and rationalizing, by which 
science and life were governed in his time. He 
threw into relief(jthe holistic point of view from 
which alone he found human life understandable, 
and thus disclosed the whole complexity of concrete 
human existence./ In this respect he stands in line 
with philosophers like Dilthey, Bergson, Whitehead, 
and Dewey. In his aim of concreteness, and in his 
emphasis on the holistic point of view, he was a 
forerunner of the Gestalt psychologists, of such biolo- 
gists as Child, Coghill, Herrick, and Lashley, of 
psychiatrists like Adolf Meyer and Trigant Burrow, 
and finally of that approach through which I myself 
have attempted to treat medicine, psychology, and 
biology. 1 

To the physician, the need for emphasis upon the 
practical is clearly evident. Even in his theoretical 
considerations, it is natural for him to be drawn in a 
practical direction, because the problem of healing 
is the very heart of his activity. In the_apprpach 
toward healing^ 



^ . 

witlfthe innumerable single phenomena , in disease; 
weToiow t^]Sese_phenomena are not Jlie essentials 
)f the disease. More and more we approach the con- 
/ictionfthatThe essential element of disease is the 



6 HUMAN NATURE 

shock to the existence ofjthe individual caused by 
the^Stobance^oTthe well-regulated^functioning ol 
tl^^rganj^mjbj^ disease. 'iTTestorattofflTbut of the 
question ,(the only goaTof tjiejphysidan is to provide 
tEe patient with theTpossibility of existing in spite 
pf his defect. 2 ] Tojo this one has to consider each 
single symptom in termsjrfjts funcHonaT significance 
fqiTftie total personality of the patient. ThusTit is 
Dbviouslyjiecgssary for thejphysician to know the 
organism as a whole, the^ total personality^ jTHs 
he change which this 



_ through disease.jJThe whole or- 

ganism, the individual human being, becomes the 
:enter of interest. 

Naturally one cannot fail to observe that a true 
insight into the condition of the individual is to bg 
gained jmlyjfj[di^ part 

}f the wholejpf natur^particularly of the humaii 
socie^lto which it belongsPMany manifesfatiras of 
Ssease can be ui^erstood^niyTn^the light of their 
social origin antTcan^be eliminated ^mljTby consider- 
ing tKis ommTSuch a view leads to the study of the 

.j-^-- -- - s-^~/~"^ S\^~ --- - ' - " ^ ' *^ ' ^-*~*^~ --- ^~- 

interrelationships between the individual and society, 
he differences betwecnjjations aji^peopl^s, ami the 
/anatfons in Individuals ^hemselves. 

All these questions have brought the problem of 
Jie nature of man to the fore. Since the end of the 
ast century this problem has gained more and more 
ii general interest. Following a period of relative 
security during the second half of the last century, 




THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 7 

situation became fraught with increasing 
^ Ultimately the loundations of human 
existence were doubted or shattered altogether. This 
state of affairs prompted the question: May notjthis 
disaster jbavejieen pror|u(^od through( a false Jdea^of 
the nature of the human being ?^ Did the institutions 
aHd^organizationi^f"ggciety crumble because^ they 
Tailed to fit the ^agaciti^s of that nature, and_were 
men theri^^ them?_ InJ*i e west- 

ern world these institutions were based especiallyi 
high estimate of the human capacity called] 
"since flTe\tme / ^Ttlie 6reeEs hacTbeen 
corcsiaered as the" most important and the most 
fundamental capacity of the human race. Could 
this assumption possibly have been wrong? Is man a 
being governed mainly by reason? Or is it incorrect 
to suppose that it is this capacity which principally 
separates man from animals? Ought not the human 
being perhaps to be considered only as a species of 
animal, possibly uniquely developed, but an animal 
just the same, motivated in his activities by "in- 
stincts" and "drives" and not by reason and free 
will? 

The experiences of the last few decades, in Europe 
in particular, have awakened great doubt regarding 
the character of human nature. Qualities have been 
proclaimed from the housetops as the highest virtues 
which in their very nature stand in complete opposi- 
tion to those social and moral ideas which have 
formed the basis of western culture for thousands of 



8 



HUMAN NATURE 



years.- j.ne success of these new ideas has shaken 
the old faith^The nature of man has thus become 
problematic at its very core, and this is likely To 
affect the whole existence of the human race. ~Thus 
itls understandable that, as the German philosopher 
Max Scheler 3 said, "in the ten thousand years ^of 
Ruffian history ours is the first era in 'whiter man 4ia& 
"become a problem to himself, in which he nojpnger 
Imows wEat Tiejs^ and^t the same time'Tmowsl2S"t 
lie d6es~not know it." 

1 Based ontfer situation, the increased interest of 
scientists in man has emerged in various realms 
in anthropology and ethnology, which have tried to 
gain a Fetter "msigETmto the nature"of man in gen- 
era^ especially throughTa jCompar isoh of ^civilizecF 
and "primitive" peoples; in mecficine andjpsychpL- 
"ogy, 4 where a science of the indivfduaTperspnality 
TiasT)eeli "more" and more urgently demanded; and 
-finally in philosophy. 

It wa^natur^lthat, in the developm^it of this 
approach to man in his entiret^in6?^^^^ 
"^eMmenon^wliidi till then soence^haxl stressed in 
all its various fieldsT^ould have diminisned. Thi$ 
Vneant a turnmsr away from the atomistic and mecha- 

jV-~x--- .^ ^__ ^^ -r-Cx-> - ~^^' V * > ^ X T N * S~~~^'~*~~~ 

nisfic appfoaclip from a mere theoretical attitude^ 
toward enipmosm ^M^cbncreteness. TfiTsTtendency 

Lpror^5^ rft '" ^^ inHiviHiifll 



well 



increasing 



departments o 

concem^yith synthesizing the results prthejlivgrse 

sciences w hkh 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 9 

atioiT little ^but,.j^h3^j^aLphenQmena ? nowjriea^.tc 
base its conclusions not only ugon the results of 
physical anthropology but also ugon those of "eth- 
nology, psychology, sociology, philosophy^ and pa- 
thology. That^thjs elifmnaHorT~of the Jmes oi 
3eH^catjSnTetween the^^^ous^scfen^^ in order 
EcTattam a clearer view of the real facts a charac- 
teristic oTth"e~irr0iaenrapproacIT of Biological science 
especially of the science of man was familiar tc 
James may be judged from such statements as: 
"There is no valid demarcation between philosophy 

^-~~}>^ *""~V"W^ * ->**-~^- <-"">'~w--v w ,^~v^ <--vv -y-t 1 ^-v * V^*^** 1 

and^p^^io^ical^gsycholpgy.' 7 

^When a student of humaifnature bases his studies 
on the results of one special science, he has nothing 
but a starting point; he will never derive a correct 
answer to his questions from the material of a singk 
realm alone. In this connection, I should like tc 
consider _my own use of pathological material. 

/With jour Jjpljgfoc approach to human na^jire. w^ 
arej aced with a yery_diffi_cult epistemological^ prob 
For us there is no doubt that the atomistic 



method is_the onljMegitimate scientific^proiceKre 
for gainingjacts^^nowledge ol Human nature hag 
to be based ^^h e ^9J^.? na jdi^osd^^ 



_ .^ 

BuFis it^possible tojroceed from material gained by 
tEeHseTof this method to^a science of the organism 
science of the nature of man? 5 



If the organism were a sum of parts which we 
:ould study separately, there would be no difficulty 



10 HUMAN NATURE 

in combining our knowledge about the parts to form 
a science of the whole. But all attempts_to under- 
stand the organism as a whole directly from these 
phenomena have met with very little success. They 
have not J3gen_successful, wejgmv_conclude, because 
Bie organism is not such a sum of jpaits^^The ..ana- 
lytic experiment maylioFTDeTsuitable in principle for 
finding out the real constituent attributes of i or- 
ganism and leading to a recognition of the organism 
as a whole. 

If the organism is a whole and each section of it 
functions normally within that whole, then in the 
analytic experiment, which isolates the sections as it 
studies them, the properties and functions of any 
part must be modified by their isolation^from the 
whole of the organismy/ThiisJ^ 
function_of^ these parts in normaMife. There are 

innumerable"fels"TOic!TdenTdnstrate how the jfunc- 

_ .__ ft. \_ ^ ""-- < " 
tiomng-of ai field $ changed by itsTis'olation. If we 

want to use the~f esulfs of suffi~exjperfmentsTor under- 
standing the activity of the organism in normal life 
(that is, as a whole), we must know in what way the 
condition of isolation modifies the functioning, and 
we must take these modifications into account. We 
have every reason to occupy ourselves very carefully 
with this condition of isolation; as we shall see later, 
many a phenomenon of human life is understandably 
Wy in terms of the effects of isolation. 

In order to understand these modifications of func- 
tions in isolation we must discuss the function of the 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH II 

nervous system. 6 Such an excursion will also be 
valuaHeTfor the understanding of certain other prob- 
lems which we shall have to discuss later. Naturally, 
I must confine myself to the most important facts, 
and can only outline them in apodeictic form. 

The organism^jvve^ assume, fraTunitT^Ve shall con- 
sider~tKe functioning oTTHiTlmiFEy means of the 
facts gained through studies of the nervous system, 
because the functioning of this system lends itself 
especially well to explanation. The nervous system i g 
an apparatus which always functions as a whole.JXis 
always in a state of excitation, neveTat rest. ^M 
performances are expressions of chan^esin_thls con- 
dlition of perpetual activity, wfiich arecaused by 
the stimuli that impinge upon the organism. These 
"changes always concern the entire system, but not in 
the same manner throughout, the special effect of 
any stimulus becoming apparent in one particular 
place. Stimulation of the eyes by light is usually 
followed by movements of the pupils or of other eye 
muscles, and by vision. If we assume that stimula- 
tion spreads over the whole system, this localized 
effect can be explained in the following way. Stimu- 
lation may change the excitation in the whole sys- 
tem, but it changes it in an effective way particularly 
in the part of the body near the entrance of the 
stimulus. We call this the local or spatial near effect. 
The particular effect of a stimulus, however, results 
not only from the special excitation of those parts 
of the body which are in the neighborhood of the 



12 HUMAN NATURE 

point of entrance of the stimulus, but also from the 
specific receptiveness of definite parts of the nervous 
system to specific stimuli. The eyes, for example, 
are specifically adapted to be affected by light, the 
nose by odor, and so on. We call this the functional 
near effect, in distinction to the spatial near effect. 
The performance caused by a stimulus is the expres- 
sion of the excitation of both the spatial and the 
functional near effect. The processes set off by the 
stimulus are not restricted to a part of the nervous 
system the excitation of which corresponds to the 
performance for example, the perception of an 
object; the rest of the nervous system is also more 
or less involved, and there is a characteristic rela- 
tionship between the excitation in the near part and 
excitation arising in the distant parts. We speak in 
this connection of the near effect as the figure process 
and of the excitation in the rest of the nervous sys- 
tem as the ground process. In the same way we speak 
of figure and background in a performance. Any 
excitation in the nervous system has the character 
of a figure-ground process. Any performance in- 
variably shows this figure-ground character. 

When you look at a picture you see and under- 
stand at once what is figure and what background. 
The terms "figure" and "ground" have, indeed, been 
borrowed from our visual experience. However, they 
fit not only visual configurations but all other con- 
figurations as well. For example, if you raise your 
arm vertically, the exact execution of this movement 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 13 

requires, as you can feel in yourself and observe in 
others, a quite definite position of the rest of the 
body. The raised arm is the figure; the rest of the 
body is the background. Figure and background can 
be discriminated as readily in speaking, thinking, 
feeling, etc. A word, for instance, is understandable 
only within a definite context, within a definite sen- 
tence, within a certain cultural sphere. 

Habitually we ignore the background of a per- 
formance and pay attention only to the figure. From 
the standpoint of systematic observation and meth- 
odology this is false, for figure and background are 
intimately interconnected. Neither can be properly 
evaluated without the other. 

As an example of the influence of the background 
on the figure let me recall first how the impression of 
a simple color changes if it is presented on different 
backgrounds. Just so, the execution of any precise 
movement of a limb demands a definite attitude of 
the rest of the body. The most superficial glance at 
the way we walk will show that the correct move- 
ments of our legs in walking depend upon definite 
movements of our arms and head. When for any 
reason freedom of arms and head is impeded, the gait 
changes immediately; in short, when the background 
changes, the figure (the performance) also changes. 

In the normal organism a definite stimulus pro- 
duces under the same conditions approximately the 
same figure and ground configuration, and with it 
approximately the same reaction. For example, a 



14 HUMAN NATURE 

person always has about the same visual acuity; 
that is, the same visual stimulus a point of definite 
extension and color on a definite background pro- 
duces the same visual experience. The reaction is 
based on what is called the threshold of vision. If 
the threshold did not remain approximately equal 
under normal conditions, it would not be possible 
for a given object or part of the physical world to 
arouse the same experience again and again nor 
should we be able to react to the same situation 
in a consistent way. Only through such uniformity 
is an ordered life possible. Otherwise our world 
would change constantly, and we ourselves would 
change, too. But this is not the case. Our world 
remains relatively constant despite all the changes 
in it, and we, too, remain about the same. 

On the other hand, there is no doubt that each 
stimulus produces a change in the substratum which 
changes its excitability, with the result that a new 
stimulus equal to the former one gives rise to 
an effect different from the previous one. 7 Now how 
is it possible that in spite of this change of excit- 
ability through stimulation the threshold remains 
approximately the same, that the organism remains 
about the same, and that it reacts in about the same 
way to a later stimulus? This constancy is achieved 
only by virtue of the fact that in normal life ex- 
citation which has been changed by a stimulus re- 
turns, after a period of time, to its former state; that 
is, if no new stimulation occurs, it returns to a state of 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 15 

equilibrium. The presupposition of constancy is that 
the change in excitability caused by the stimulus is 
only temporary. 

This equalization process fixes the threshold and, 
with this, creates constancy, ordered behavior, and 
secures the very existence of the organism. Normal 
equalization demands the working of the whole or- 
ganism; it is, in fact, an equalization between the 
excitation in near and distant parts. (formal life is 
ordered life because the equalization process takes 
place in relation to the tasks of the whole organism. 
This is not the case under experimental and patholog- 
ical conditions. In an experiment we deliberately 
isolate the parts we wish to study. This is perfectly 
evident in experiments on animals where, for exam- 
ple, we separate the spinal cord from the brain and 
study the functioning of the isolated spinal cord by 
stimulating it when it is cut off from the rest of the 
nervous system. But there is no difference in principle 
in our method of studying reflexes in human beings, 
or elementary functions such as vision, hearing, etc. 
Here, so to speak, we functionally isolate the part 
to be tested, excluding by special arrangements the 
co-working of the rest of the organism. Pathological 
processes, too, are rather like the experiments on 
animals in the way they isolate parts of the nervous 
system. Pathology consists in the destruction of 
some regions of the nervous system, as a result of 
which the latter is divided into parts, each of which 
functions in isolation from the rest. This separation 



1 6 HUMAN NATURE 

may take place in various parts of the nervous sys- 
tem, and the symptoms in different fields correspond 
to the isolation of different parts. 

Now how does isolation change the functioning 
of the nervous system and modify its reactions? 8 
We shall mention here only such facts as are impor- 
tant for the explanation to follow. 

1. The reactions to stimuli in an isolated part are 
abnormally strong. For example, knee jerks in an 
animal with a lesion of the upper part of the spinal 
cord are exaggerated. The explanation is that the 
excitation produced by the stimulus, which normally 
spreads over the whole nervous system, is now re- 
stricted to a smaller part of the organ and therefore 
has a greater effect. 

2. The reactions are of abnormal duration, be- 
cause the normal equalization process is disturbed. 

3. The reactions are bound to the stimulus in an 
abnormal way. We call this phenomenon abnormal 
stimulus bondage, or forced responsiveness to stimuli. 
Normally a reaction is determined not only by the 
stimulus but also by the after-effects of former re- 
actions, which are elicited by the stimulus at the 
same time. These after-effects correspond to proc- 
esses not only in the stimulated part of the organism 
but also in the rest of the organism. Now if the 
stimulated part is more or less detached from the 
rest of the organism, those processes cannot be uti- 
lized in the reaction as they normally would. In 
consequence, the outside stimuli gain an abnormal 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 17 

predominance and compel the organism to react in 
a more than normal way. This effect of isolation is 
to be seen particularly clearly in sick people. They 
are in general much more under the influence of ex- 
ternal stimuli, less capable of freeing themselves 
from a stimulus which has touched them, than well 
people. 

This abnormal bondage to an existing stimulus 
appears also when the stimulation originates not 
externally but in an excitation of any part within 
the organism, if this part is isolated from the rest 
of the organism. Thus isolated processes within the 
organism may determine the reactions of the sick 
individual in an abnormal, compulsive way. In the 
mental field this finds its expression in the abnormal 
predominance of particular thoughts, ideas, or com- 
pulsive activities. To the individual himself these 
phenomena seem strange and not a part of him. 

4. A further change of the form of the reaction 
in an isolated part is the appearance of abnormal 
rigidity on the one hand and alternating reactions 
to a single stimulus on the other. This is the conse- 
quence of a disturbance of the normal figure-ground 
process. If the stimulus which touches an isolated 
part is adequate for the activity of this part, the 
reaction, the "figure," becomes abnormally fixed 
because of the lack of the equalization process.* 
If the stimulus is adequate only to a section of this 
part, then a reaction may appear which corresponds 

* Cf. point 2, above. 



1 8 HUMAN NATURE 

to that section. But this excitation, the "figure," has 
no constancy, because the rest of the isolated part 
does not represent an adequate background. Ex- 
citation of this part may gain preponderance after a 
certain time, and a phenomenon appears that cor- 
responds to the stimulation of the rest of the part. 
After a time this reaction, which is also not a "good" 
figure and therefore has no stability, disappears, and 
a reaction corresponding to the excitation of the first 
stimulated section returns, and so on, in alternation. 
This we call "lability." Such alternating reactions 
are frequently observed in patients with mental dis- 
eases. 

5. The detachment of a part of the organism 
from the rest more or less deprives the activities of 
that part of content. Therefore actions in isolation 
are simpler or, as we say, more "primitive." 

Isolation phenomena are characteristic of patho- 
logical conditions. They may also occur in normal 
life if stimulation gains an abnormal strength or an 
abnormal duration which hinders the normal equali- 
zation process. We shall see later that much of the 
behavior of normal people becomes understandable 
when considered as phenomena in an isolation caused 
through abnormal outer-world conditions. 

I should like to illustrate the effect of isolation by 
some simple examples, from experiences open to 
everybody. We can isolate processes in our own 
bodies by special experimental procedure. We can 
expose our visual apparatus to abnormal stimula- 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 19 

tion, as in after-image experiments, where we allow 
a color to act intensively on our eyes. In that case 
we obtain both an abnormal after-effect and repeated 
alternations of opposite (complementary) color sen- 
sations. Or take a similar phenomenon in the motor 
field. If, with the arm hanging loosely, one presses 
the hand against a wall so that the deltoid muscle is 
strongly innervated, the arm rises by itself. The less 
attention the subject pays to the arm, thereby iso- 
lating it, the more striking the phenomenon is. If 
one succeeds in this isolation, one experiences an 
alternating movement, the arm rising and falling 
several times. The Danish psychologist, Rubin, to 
whom we are greatly indebted for the elucidation of 
the figure-ground problem, has constructed a figure 
which is designed especially for the demonstration 
of the alternation phenomenon (Fig. i). 9 When we 
look at it passively, oscillation appears very readily; 
we see now a white vase on a black background, now 
two black faces on a white background. We also 
feel that this oscillation is, so to speak, detached 
from our personality, that it takes place almost 
against our will. 

All these phenomena are "isolated" from us. The 
isolation becomes particularly clear if we succeed 
in bringing one of the phenomena into closer rela- 
tionship to ourselves. Then the character of lability 
disappears, or at least decreases strongly. Some 
events gain definiteness and stability. That is to be 
observed especially in the last example. When we do 



20 HUMAN NATURE 

not take the figure merely as a visual picture, but 
look at the vase or the two faces as if they were real 
objects, the lability lessens. Apparently the experi- 
ence of alternation corresponds to a more passive 



FIG. i 

stimulation of a part of the organism, namely, the 
visual apparatus that is, to the stimulation of a 
part which, functionally, is relatively isolated from 
the whole personality. The more complete the ap- 
proach of the whole organism to an object in the 
outer world, the more constant the object: Because 
in everyday life we usually make the complete ap- 
proach, the objects of the outer world are definitely 
figures, and there is never under normal conditions 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 21 

a change of figure and ground or even an uncertainty 
about what is figure and what is ground. 

There is no doubt that, if we take into consider- 
ation the changes that occur through isolation, the 
phenomena revealed by the isolating method can be 
used in a way adapted to our purpose, which is to 
understand the organism as a whole. Even then we 
do not know whether the phenomena we observe 
correspond to the essential properties of the organ- 
ism or whether they may represent merely accidental 
expressions of the organism under certain possibly 
very unnatural conditions. As we shall see later, 
we shall come nearer to our goal by using another 
methodological procedure.* This consists in the use 
of observations under certain conditions which we 
call preferred conditions. The phenomena observed 
under these conditions we call them preferred 
behavior or preferred performances will bring us 
somewhat nearer to the true constituents of the or- 
ganism. Even then, however, we remain still within 
the realm of the analytic method, and we can never 
be sure that we possess the attributes characteristic 
of the organism as a whole. Thus our endeavor to 
gain any knowledge of the nature of man seems to 
be doomed to failure. Certainly there is no possi- 
bility of achieving biological knowledge on the sole 
basis of phenomena which can be determined by the 
analytic method. In making this statement, how- 
ever, I do not wish to arouse the impression that we 

*Seep. 174- 



22 HUMAN NATURE 

underrate the significance of such phenomena or that 
we believe there is no real possibility of gaining 
biological knowledge. Concerning the first point, I 
may say that we do not accept these phenomena as 
undistorted manifestations of the nature of the or- 
ganism. They must first prove their "significance" 
for the organism. They are the material with which 
we have to deal, but the value they have for our 
understanding of the behavior of an organism de- 
pends upon our conception of the latter. In this way 
they lose their apparent character of self-evident 
facts. Thus what biology in general believes to be 
the basis of its body of knowledge, the "facts/ 7 be- 
comes most problematic. For this reason many facts 
in the history of science have proved to be without 
value for the advancement of our knowledge. I be- 
lieve that this skepticism toward what we call facts 
is a basic requirement for fruitful work in all 
branches of natural science. It is only this skepti- 
cism which eliminates existing biases by preparing 
the ground for posing the fundamental question: 
Which phenomena are biologically relevant, and 
which not? Which phenomena are biological "facts," 
and which not? 

A criterion for that relevancy can be offered only 
by a conception of the organism in its qualitative 
organization and holistic functioning. This concep- 
tion is the basis of biological knowledge. How can 
we gain it? It is not a mere synthesis of separate 
phenomena. It is true that the latter point to the 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 23 

organization in question, but such a picture of the 
organism cannot be obtained directly from them. 
Neither can it be obtained by means of the simple 
inductive method. It is not a question of generaliz- 
ing or of applying to other circumstances the results 
of previous observations, and thus of enlarging our 
knowledge progressively by induction. This factor 
certainly plays a large part in concrete scientific 
work, but it does not furnish us with knowledge, nor 
does it make a scientific description of biological 
phenomena possible. Yet neither is the process of 
acquiring biological knowledge a deductive proce- 
dure. We do not adhere in any way to the a priori 
method of preconceived categories applied to the 
nature of life, to the differences between animals and 
"human beings," etc. 

We do not try to construct the architecture of the 
organism by a mere addition of brick to brick; rather 
we try to discover the actual Gestalt of the intrinsic 
structure of this building, a Gestalt through which 
some phenomena may become intelligible as belong- 
ing to a unitary, ordered, relatively constant forma- 
tion of a specific structure, and other phenomena 
may become intelligible as not belonging to it. The 
picture of the organism must be of such a kind that 
it allows us to differentiate among the observed 
phenomena between the members which really be- 
long to it and phenomena corresponding to less rele- 
vant arbitrary connections between contingent parts. 

The concept which should help us to make this 



24 HUMAN NATURE 

differentiation is grounded in the reality which con- 
stitutes being, but it is an idea, a criterion by which 
something is known (Erkenntnisgrund). We can 
arrive at it only by using a special procedure of 
cognition a form of creative activity by which we 
build a picture of the organism on the basis of the 
facts gained through the analytic method, in a form 
of ideation similar to the procedure of an artist. It 
is a sort of ideation, however, which springs ever and 
again from empirical facts, and never fails to be 
grounded in and substantiated by them! Biological 
knowledge is the result of the continued extension of 
our experience. The German poet, Goethe, to whom 
we owe much for important discoveries in the field of 
biology, has called this procedure of acquiring knowl- 
edge SckaUj and the "picture" by which the indi- 
vidual phenomenon becomes understandable (as a 
modification), the Urbild (prototype). To recom- 
mend such a type of cognitive procedure may suggest 
that we are headed for metaphysical or even mystical 
fields. This impression can readily be dispelled by 
pointing to such a trivial biological phenomenon as 
the acquisition of any skill bicycling, for example. 
We execute inappropriate bodily movements that 
is, movements which are determined by partitive 
aspects and which are only partially relevant for 
correct bicycle-riding until suddenly we are capa- 
ble of maintaining our balance and of moving in the 
correct way. All these initial exercises are only in- 
directly related to the performance finally achieved. 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 25 

They are not aimless, of course, but merely incorrect 
movements which in themselves never lead directly 
to the correct movements. They are necessary be- 
cause the correct performance can be reached only 
by continuous modifications of those movements. 
The correct movements appear suddenly, however, 
when a state is reached in which the procedure of the 
organism is adequate to the environmental condi- 
tions. This adequacy is experienced by us. The 
procedure in this situation also includes insight into 
the correct procedure in bicycling. We continually 
try to bring about this experience of adequacy, and 
the correct procedure, until it becomes the perform- 
ance that we set going when we attempt to ride a 
bicycle. 

In essence the biological knowledge we are seeking 
is akin to this phenomenon in which the capacity of 
the organism becomes adequate to environmental 
conditions. This is the fundamental biological proc- 
ess by virtue of which the actualization of the or- 
ganism, and with that its existence, is made possible. 
Whenever we speak of the nature of the organism, 
of the idea, the picture, or the concept of the organ- 
ism, we have in mind the essentials for the oc- 
currence of an adequate relationship between the 
organism and its environment. From these, in prin- 
ciple, that picture arises which we have to grasp in 
determining the nature of man. In doing so we are 
subjected to practically the same difficulties of pro- 
cedure as the organism in learning: we are obliged 



26 HUMAN NATURE 

to discover what the relationship is between concept 
and reality. 

In practice the difficulties which this method may 
seem to entail are not so great as they appear in theo- 
retical consideration. In practice we usually venture 
to pass from the plane of partitive facts (which 
corresponds to the isolating method) to this other 
form of cognition. The more conscious we are of the 
theoretical justification of this procedure and of its 
consequences, the less concerned we need be about 
doing so. We usually proceed in such a way that 
from certain facts gained by analysis we sketch a 
picture of the whole organism, which in turn, so long 
as we encounter discrepancies between this picture 
and factual experience, stimulates further questions 
and investigations. Upon the basis of new inquiries 
the picture of the whole is again modified, and the 
process of discovering new discrepancies and mak- 
ing new inquiries follows, and so on. By such em- 
pirical procedure in a dialectic manner, a progres- 
sively more adequate knowledge of the nature of the 
organism, of its "essence" (Wesen}, is acquired, 
and an increasingly correct evaluation of the ob- 
served facts, and of whether or not they are essen- 
tial to the organism, is obtained. 

The process of acquiring knowledge which we have 
described as characteristic of biology does not differ 
in principle from that used in other sciences. As 
skepticism toward a naive copy-theory of knowledge 
grew, and as it was realized that "empirical" facts 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 27 

are not a simple expression of reality but are also 
produced through the method of investigation, it 
became more and more clear that it was the task of 
natural science to transcend "empirical" facts and 
create images, "symbols," which are suited for gain- 
ing a coherent understanding of the "facts." In 
physics the concept of the symbol has become, so to 
speak, as Ernst Cassirer has explained, "the center- 
point and focus of our entire epistemology." Ac- 
cording to the French historian of physics, Duhem, 
the dividing line between physical theory and mere 
empiricism is the fact that there is no direct transi- 
tion to physical knowledge from the empirical col- 
lecting and ordering of "facts." It is a matter of a 
transgressus, a transition, to a new perspective. In- 
stead of the concrete data, we use symbolic images, 
"which are supposed to correspond to data on the 
basis of theoretical postulates which the observer 
considers as true and valid. . . . The significance of 
these concepts is not manifest in immediate percep- 
tion, but can be determined and secured only by an 
extremely complex process of intellectual interpreta- 
tion." 10 This conceptual interpretation represents 
the character of physical theory. In biological 
knowledge as well, it is necessary that the "creative 
power of imagination" should become effective. In 
my opinion, however, there is still a difference 
between physical and biological knowledge. The 
symbols which biology requires for the coherent 
representation of empirical facts must come closer 



28 HUMAN NATURE 

to the "real" than is requisite for science of inorganic 
nature. This is due to the fact that, in the field of 
biology, knowledge and action are more intimately 
related than in physical science. Knowledge in biol- 
ogy always has to stand the test of usefulness. We 
do not want merely to understand the nature of an 
organism and to use our understanding secondarily 
for practical purposes; we are primarily interested 
in guaranteeing the existence of the living being, in 
helping it to live according to its nature and as well 
as possible. We need knowledge which will do jus- 
tice to the whole organism, because in biology action 
always involves the individual as a whole. Mere 
reference to a part is insufficient. Even though an 
action may fit a part, it may distort the functioning 
of the whole. Therefore we cannot be satisfied with 
symbols which correspond only to part processes. 
We have to reject, for example, as we shall explain 
later, the scheme which serves as the basis of reflex- 
ology. We need symbols which are not as essentially 
alien to the observed phenomena as it is permissible 
for the symbols of physical science to be; in extreme 
cases physical science can confine itself to and con- 
tent itself with a system of fictitious "signs." Bio- 
logical knowledge also remains a set of symbols and 
deals with substitutes, it is true, but it does not make 
use of representation by simple arbitrary signs. 
Biological knowledge needs a more complete image, 
of an individual concrete character, which must 
match as closely as possible the particulars from 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 29 

which we build it up. After all, we do not regard the 
particular data we are studying as mere appearances, 
but as things which pertain to the reality of the whole 
organism, although they are insufficient for its direct 
cognition. Biological understanding, furthermore, 
can never be satisfied with finding laws of relation- 
ship between completely undetermined, theoretically 
assumed elements. In biology, symbols, theoretical 
representations, must in principle include quality and 
individuality in all their determinations. Biological 
descriptions must exhibit a definite qualitative or- 
ganization ; the symbol must have the character of a 
Gestalt. For this reason, though it is not unusual in 
physics, the assumption of various principles of ex- 
planation of the processes in an organism is unten- 
able. In physics diverse systems of symbols may 
coexist and may be put to practical use at the same 
time. I am thinking here, for example, of the fact 
that the wave theory and the corpuscular conception 
in the light-quantum theory are both valid. Such a 
multiplicity of theories is not only theoretically tol- 
erable for the physicist but does not necessarily 
obstruct his practical dealings. Yet such a procedure 
would not satisfy the requirements of biology. 11 

From these differences between physical and bio- 
logical symbols it is understandable that, in spite of 
their agreement in basic procedure, physical science 
might find itself in opposition to the method of cog- 
nition here proposed. The contrast between the two 
sciences has often been apparent, and has led both 



30 HUMAN NATURE 

to opposing tendencies within biology and to heated 
controversies between scientists. It is clear that, 
when based on the procedure we have chosen, our 
knowledge in the field of biology can never be final, 
and that we must content ourselves with an increas- 
ing approximation to the truth. This approximation 
must not be understood, however, in the sense of the 
approximate value of a mathematical series, which 
increases in correctness as we are able to determine 
decimal points, and where we can be satisfied with 
a limited number of decimals. It may be that bio- 
logical knowledge frequently has a similar character, 
but in principle it is of an entirely different kind. 
Biological knowledge is not advanced by simply 
adding more and more individual facts. The facts 
which are gradually included in the "whole" as parts 
can never be evaluated merely quantitatively, in 
such a way that the more parts we are able to deter- 
mine the firmer our knowledge becomes. In biology 
every fact always has a qualitative significance. 
Thus one single new fact may revolutionize an entire 
conception based on former findings, and demand an 
entirely new theory, in the light of which old facts 
may have to be newly evaluated. Final completeness 
and definiteness in biology is never possible unless 
one has recourse to explicit or non-explicit meta- 
physical interpretations, and these we have to reject 
as unempirical. Indeed, if one defines biology merely 
as the accumulation of single data, which must be 
secured by the analytic method, then he has to choose 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 31 

between two alternatives: either he renounces the 
type of understanding which grasps the organism 
as a whole and in so doing virtually rescinds 
cognition in biology in general or he resorts to 
metaphysical and speculative doctrines in order to 
supplement the body of his knowledge of the organ- 
ism. Naturally we reject the latter procedure, al- 
though it has been frequently proposed in recent 
years, be it in the notion of vitalism, the idea of 
entelechy, or any kind of teleological approach. 

Needless to say, the approach suggested here takes 
a fundamentally different course. Although this ap- 
proach aims to attain knowledge of the nature of the 
organism by a method which deviates from the 
analytic-synthetic procedure, nevertheless it springs 
from the conviction that it offers the same objec- 
tivity and exactness as physical science. The claim 
of our approach to objectivity is grounded in the 
fact that it introduces as a working hypothesis an 
image of the organism as a whole, which is the sup- 
porting frame of reference for the determination of 
the factors that condition the phenomena that are 
within reach of our empirical observations. The 
claim of our approach to exactness is grounded in 
the fact that it is ready to shift its working hypoth- 
eses whenever new data demand a reorientation and 
reorganization, in order to fit in all the evidence of 
the phenomena observed. 

Such an approach, of course, is ultimately tied up 
with the personality of the scientist. One man may 



32 HUMAN NATURE 

be convinced that the task of science is the accumu- 
lation of piecemeal data without any attempt at ex- 
planatory hypotheses, that this is the ethics of sci- 
ence. In that case he will content himself with the 
stepwise procedure of cataloguing unrelated facts 
ad infinitum. He achieves little for the understand- 
ing of nature, but he risks nothing. Another man 
may believe that progress in science requires cour- 
age the courage to advance explanatory hypoth- 
eses, to test them empirically, to expose them to 
criticism, even to renounce and to revise them, if 
necessary. There is risk in this, but the result 
satisfactory or unsatisfactory meets the standards 
of his ethical conviction that biology must strive 
perpetually for adequate knowledge the object 
of its study, the living organism. 

This point of view is not far removed from Wil- 
liam James's idea about belief, which he advanced 
not only in the field of religion but also in science. 
Productive thinking, he says, presupposes belief: 
"The same attitude of initial belief is necessary in 
the case of specific theories and hypotheses, if we do 
not want to content ourselves with a dogmatic 
negation as crudely dogmatic in its spirit and 
method as any primitive taboo." 12 Certainly, belief 
contains the danger of dogmatism. One may avoid 
this, according to James and Perry, provided that 
one combines belief "with a readiness to abandon the 
hypothesis if after a period of trial the evidence is 
negative." 1S Recognizing the similarity of my own 
epistemological standpoint in biology to this attitude 



THE HOLISTIC APPROACH 33 

toward cognition, I should like to add one thing. It 
is not sufficient to abandon a hypothesis after a 
period of trials with conflicting results. We can 
avoid error only if we are ready to give up our pic- 
ture of the organism if any new phenomenon does 
not fit in with it, and if we try again and again to 
build up a new one through which all the given facts 
are understandable. We should not make auxiliary 
hypotheses; or, if we do, we must be conscious of 
doing so, aware of their transient character, and 
willing to give them up. 

It may be difficult to see how the scientist can be 
convinced of the value of his scientific activities 
and he must be so convinced in order to carry on 
his work and at the same time aware of the pos- 
sibility of being deceived, open-minded enough to 
see his own fallacies, and tolerant enough to confess 
that other people may be right. It may be difficult, 
I say, to believe that such contrary attitudes can be 
taken at the same time, but there is no doubt that it 
is possible, and I would say that the realization of 
that possibility is what makes a man a scientist. 
This attitude will not appear so strange if we realize 
that it corresponds very well to human nature, that 
it is characteristic of the approach of man to the 
world. 

We shall see that our general concept of biological 
science is fruitful in connection with the special 
problem with which we have to deal in these lectures 
human nature as seen in the light of experiences 
with sick people. 



II 

PATHOLOGY AND THE NATURE OF MAN 

DURING the last few decades the use of the observa- 
tion of patients with mental diseases for the under- 
standing of normal human behavior has become more 
and more customary. For example, there was an 
attempt to make the behavior of primitive people 
intelligible in this way; the paintings and sculpture 
of primitive people were compared with the paintings 
and sculpture of the insane. By means of such com- 
parisons the concept of a primitive, "archaic" form 
of thinking was developed. 1 I should also like to 
point out to what an extent the attempts to under- 
stand the cultural phenomena of early periods of 
mankind have been influenced by the psychoanalytic 
conception of neurosis. It is not necessary to discuss 
here the question of the relevance of these efforts. 
There is no doubt that they brought into focus many 
characteristics of human nature which before that 
had not been taken into consideration at all, or at 
least less than they deserved. 

Before considering the phenomena observable in 
patients with mental diseases we must answer two 
questions: (i) Is it not dangerous to use pathologi- 
cal phenomena for formulating ideas about norma' 
human nature? (2) Why do we use observations oi 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 35 

pathologically changed human beings? What is the 
advantage of that procedure as compared with the use 
of the observation of normal persons? 

In regard to the danger involved in using patho- 
logical phenomena, if one considers pathological 
facts as has very often been done as curiosities 
caused by illness and therefore not intelligible in the 
same way as the behavior of normal individuals, 
opposition to the use of pathological findings for the 
understanding of normal behavior is justified. There 
is no doubt, however, that such an assumption is 
false. If it were correct, we should not have the 
systematic statements about pathological facts that 
we do have; we should not even be able to describe 
them satisfactorily. Pathological phenomena are of a 
kind accessible to the understanding of the nor- 
mal person. They are performances which have 
been modified according to definite laws, and they 
become intelligible if one takes into consideration 
the characteristic alterations which illness produces. 
To be sure, we are not able at present to understand 
all pathological phenomena from such a point of 
view, and those which are not understandable should 
not occupy the psychologist. 

Here we shall deal only with phenomena of the 
understandable type. For this reason we shall choose 
a special kind of patient as a basis for our discussion. 
It is quite usual, particularly in textbooks of psycho- 
pathology, to start from observations of mentally ill 
persons, of psychotics and neurotics. We shall not 



36 HUMAN NATURE 

omit evidence which can be gained from such cases, 
but this material will not constitute our main source. 
It is too complicated, and it still resists unambiguous 
analysis. In all discussions of this material one finds 
much theory and very little real evidence, very few 
real facts. Another type of patient provides better 
material, allows of better observation and much bet- 
ter understanding and explanation of modifications 
in behavior the patient with an organic defect of 
the brain caused by injury or disease. 2 

,We shall first take into consideration patients with 
circumscribed lesions of the brain cortex, in whom 
the damaged brain process has healed but with some 
irreparable defect. We begin with these cases in- 
stead of with patients who have acute illnesses, be- 
cause in acute stages of illness (stages in which the 
struggle of the organism with the damage has not 
ended) the behavior picture is much more compli- 
cated, and it is much more difficult to analyze and to 
form an opinion of the changes that occur. We shall 
not overlook this acute condition, however, for we 
can also learn very much from it, particularly about 
the struggle of the organism against the damage done 
to it. 

A great part of my own material has come from 
brain injuries incurred during the first World War. 
These injuries were very well suited for study, 
because they occurred in young people in good 
general physical condition. Furthermore, we had the 
unusual opportunity of being able to observe our 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 37 

patients for a very long period of time, some for more 
than eight years, in a relatively favorable environ- 
ment. These circumstances gave us a much better 
insight into behavior than it is possible to obtain with 
patients who have brain lesions that are due to other 
causative factors, though the examination of the 
latter has not been omitted and has led us to the 
same conclusions. 

For those phenomena with which we have to 
deal first the special localization of the lesion in the 
brain cortex is relatively unimportant. 3 The phe- 
nomena are especially clear in lesions of the frontal 
lobe, and therefore we shall take our examples espe- 
cially from patients with lesions of this part of the 
brain. 4 

However, to come back to our two questions, why 
use pathological findings for understanding normal 
behavior? The answer is that we try to learn from 
the observation of sick people because we can ac- 
quire better information in this way, and acquire it 
more easily, than by observing normal individuals. 
Normal life is determined by so many factors, and 
these factors are interwoven in such various and 
complicated ways, that very often the reaction of a 
normal organism even to an apparently simple stimu- 
lation is exceedingly difficult, sometimes quite impos- 
sible, to analyze and to understand. Now the greater 
the defect of the organism, the simpler are its 
responses to stimuli, and therefore the easier to 
understand. Furthermore, pathological behavior is 



38 HUMAN NATURE 

particularly revealing concerning the organization of 
behavior. The destruction of one or another sub- 
stratum of the organism gives rise to various changes 
in behavior, showing how these substrata and forms 
of behavior are interrelated and giving an insight 
into the organization of the total organism. Just as 
it is easier to gain an insight into the organization of 
performances in sick people, so it is easier to under- 
stand their ways of adjusting to changing conditions. 
For the sick organism, to find an adjustment to the 
abnormal condition produced by sickness is a ques- 
tion of being or not being. Thus we have an espe- 
cially good opportunity of observing the forms and 
rules of adjustment, which are not always easily ob- 
served in normal persons. 

The changes to be observed in patients with brain 
lesions are manifold, and concern both mental and 
bodily performances. Even if we restrict ourselves 
to mental performances we are faced with a very 
complex picture. Usually the disturbances have been 
described as separate changes in single fields of per- 
formance, as in perception, action, speech, emotions, 
memory, etc. Researches in the lastTfew decades 
have shown more and more, however, that these 
complex pictures can be understood only if we regard 
them as expressions of a change in the total person- 
ality of the patient concerned. 

\We shall consider our findings in reference to two 
problems: first we shall concentrate on the change in 
personality; then on the adaptation of the patient 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 39 

to his defect. The study of the change of personality 
will give us some insight into the organization of the 
personality of the normal human being. The study 
of adaptation of the patient to his defect will inform 
us about the way the normal person comes to terms 
with the outer world. There would be no better way 
of getting to the heart of our problem than to give 
demonstrations with actual patients; I regret very 
much that this is impossible and that I must confine 
myself to a description of the behavior of certain 
patients. 

The patient whom I have first in mind is a man 
thirty years of age, with a lesion of the frontal lobe. 
His' customary way of living does not seem to be 
very much disturbed. He is a little slow; his face is 
rather immobile, rather rigid; his attention is directed 
very strictly to what he is doing at the moment 
say, writing a letter or speaking to someone. Con- 
fronted with tasks in various fields, under certain 
conditions he gives seemingly normal responses, but 
under other conditions he fails completely in tasks 
that are apparently very similar to those he has per- 
formed quite well. These differences will be the 
starting point of our discussion. We shall ask: What 
is the reason for the failure in the one situation, the 
correct performances in the others? 

Let us take as an example the behavior of this pa- 
tient in a simple test. We place before him a small 
wooden stick in a definite position, pointing, for ex- 
ample, diagonally from left to right. He is asked to 



40 HUMAN NATURE 

note the position of the stick carefully. After a half 
minute's exposure the stick is removed; then it is 
handed to the patient, and he is asked to put it back in 
the position in which it was before. He grasps the 
stick and tries to replace it, but he fumbles ; he is all 
confusion; he looks at the examiner, shakes his head, 
tries this way and that, plainly uncertain. The up- 
shot is that he cannot place the stick in the required 
position. He is likewise unable to imitate other 
simple figures built up of sticks. Next we show the 
patient a little house made of many sticks, a house 
with a roof, a door, a window, and a chimney. When 
he is asked to reproduce the model, he succeeds 
very well. 

If we ask what the reason may be for the differ- 
ence in the behavior of the patient in the two tasks, 
we can at once exclude defects in the fields of per- 
ception, action, and memory. For there is no doubt 
that copying the house with many details demands 
a greater capacity in all these faculties, especially in 
memory, than putting a single stick into a position 
seen shortly before. 

At first sight the difference may seem inexplicable, 
but the following experiment clarifies the situation. 
We put before the patient two sticks placed together 
so as to form an angle with the opening pointing 
upward. The patient is unable to reproduce this 
model. Then we confront him with the same angle, 
the opening pointing down this time, and now he 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 41 

reproduces the figure very well at the first trial. 
When we ask the patient how it is that he can repro- 
duce the second figure but not the first one, he says: 
"This one has nothing to do with the other one." 
Pointing to the second one, he says, "That is a roof"; 
to the first, "That is nothing." 

These two replies lead us to an understanding of 
the patient's behavior. His first reply makes it clear 
that, to him, the two objects with which he has to 
deal are totally different from one another. The 
second answer shows that he apprehends the angle 
pointing downward as a concrete object out of his 
own experience, and he constructs a concrete thing 
with the two sticks. A concrete apprehension and 
concrete behavioral action are sufficient to meet the 
conditions of this test. In the former test the two 
sticks did not arouse an impression of a concrete 
thing. He had to conceive of the positions of two 
meaningless sticks in a meaningless connection with 
each other. He had to regard the sticks as mere 
representations indicating directions in abstract 
space. Furthermore, he had to keep these directions 
in mind and rearrange the sticks from memory as 
representatives of these abstract directions. 

In the second test the patient needs to deal simply 
with a known concrete object; in the first he must 
give an account to himself of relations in space, and 
act on the basis of abstract ideas. Thus we may 
conclude that the failure of the patient in the first 



42 HUMAN NATURE 

test lies in the fact that he is unable to perform a 
task which can be executed only by means of a 
grasp of the abstract. The test in which the opening 
of the angle points down does not demand this, and 
the patient is able to execute it perfectly. It is for 
the same reason that he is able to copy the little 
house, which seems to us to be much more com- 
plicated. 

Some examples of performances by another pa- 
tient a woman with a disease of the frontal lobe 5 
may illustrate this defect still more clearly. This 
patient was also able to copy the angle pointing 
upward, and an analysis of her procedure revealed 
that this model was recognized by her as a concrete 
known object, namely, as a V. She was unable to 
copy a square, and it was obvious that this figure 
did not mean anything to her. However, she could 
copy the following model: 




Asked what it was, she explained: it was a window. 
It could be demonstrated by many examples that if 
she recognized a model presented to her as a concrete 
object she could always copy it; if not, she failed. 
When she was unable to copy a model because it did 
not mean anything to her, she sometimes changed it 
so that it assumed for her the characteristics of a 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 43 

concrete object, and then she was able to copy it. 
Faced with a square 



she produced the following picture: 




When asked what these figures meant, she answered, 
"The windows of a church/' She drew not meaning- 
less squares but three church windows in a position 
in which they might actually be found; apparently 
where we see an abstract geometrical figure, she had 
seen a concrete object. 

This lack of an attitude toward the abstract is 
found not only in such tests as we have mentioned 
but also in the behavior of the patient in general. 
Thus, for instance, the patient is unable to execute 
everyday activities if the latter demand an attitude 
toward the ^imaginary. For example, he may be able 
to perform expressive movements (say, the act of 
threatening) in situations to which they belong but is 
unable to demonstrate them outside of the situation 
which demands them. He is unable simply to demon- 
strate. He may have no difficulty in using known ob- 
jects in a situation that requires them, but he is totally 



44 HUMAN NATURE 

at a loss if he is asked to demonstrate the use of such 
in object outside of the concrete situation, and still 
more so if he is asked to,do it without the real object. 
For example, one of our patients was able to drink 
water normally out of a glass, but if he was given an 
empty glass and asked to demonstrate how one 
brings the glass to the mouth in drinking and to make 
the appropriate movements with his mouth, he was 
unable either to do so or to imitate the action after 
it had been demonstrated to him. 

There is a real gradation of difficulty in these 
various procedures, depending on the degree of con- 
creteness in the action. The easiest performance is 
to drink during dinner, if one is thirsty. Under these 
very concrete conditions only patients with the very 
greatest impairment of function fail; if the impair- 
ment is less marked, the patient may fail if he has to 
drink, let us say, not at mealtime or if he is not 
thirsty, but simply on demand. If he is asked to 
demonstrate how to drink with an empty glass or 
without a glass that is, in a situation involving a 
very high degree of abstraction he is unable to do 
it at all. The reason why the patient's capacity for 
performing these steps corresponds somewhat to the 
degree of impairment of function is that his capacity 
for abstraction is disturbed by this to a greater or 
lesser degree. 

Let us consider some other examples. The patient 
is asked to drive a nail with a hammer into a piece 
of wood. He takes the nail and drives it correctly 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 45 

by successive strokes of the hammer. Now the nail 
is taken away, and he is asked to imagine that there 
is a nail and that he is to drive it in. But this he is 
incapable of doing. He does not seem to know how 
to make the movement of driving it in either with the 
fist or with the hammer. Furthermore, even if he sees 
the nail and has the hammer in his hand, he is unable 
to make the movement of driving the nail in when 
he is not allowed to touch it. 

The patient is asked to blow away a slip of paper. 
He does this very well. If the paper is taken away, 
and he is asked to think that there is a slip of paper 
and blow it away, he is unable to do so. Here again 
the situation is not realistically complete. In order 
to perform the task the patient would have to im- 
agine the piece of paper there. He is not capable of 
this. 

The patient is asked to throw a ball into boxes 
situated respectively at distances of three, nine, and 
fifteen feet. He does it quite well. When he is asked 
how far the several boxes are from him, he is not 
only unable to answer this question but unable even 
to say which box is nearer, which farther. 

What is the difference between the two tasks? In 
the first, the patient has only to deal with objects 
in a behavioral fashion. It is unnecessary for him 
to be conscious of his act and of objects in a world 
separated from himself. In the second, however, he 
must separate himself from objects in the outer world 
and give himself an account of his actions and of the 



46 HUMAN NATURE 

space relations in the world facing him. Therefore he 
fails. 

That we do not have to deal here with a disturb- 
ance of space perception may be illustrated by an- 
other example which shows clearly that these patients 
are able to deal with complicated space relations 
when there is the possibility of doing it in a concrete 
way but fail as soon as an attitude toward the ab- 
stract is necessary. 

In a conversation a patient was asked what she 
had been doing during the day. She answered, "I 
have been working." When asked where, she offered 
to lead the way to the workroom situated on an upper 
floor of the hospital. She went directly across the 
floor to the end of the ward, where there was a closed 
door, and glanced at the nurse, apparently realizing 
that the door was locked and desiring her to open it. 
The patient opened the door with a key given to her, 
locked it from the outside, returned the key to the 
nurse, went straight to the elevator situated on the 
other side of the corridor, rang correctly, and en- 
tered it on its arrival. On reaching the floor of the 
workroom she left the elevator at the direction of 
the operator, went directly to the door of the work- 
room, and immediately took her place at the table. 
She then asked the supervisor of the workroom for 
her needlework, prepared her material, and started 
to knit. All this was done without the least hesita- 
tion, even with alacrity. Later she was asked to go 
back to the ward. She arose and left, taking the 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 47 

correct route out and heading for the elevator. When 
she was stopped before reaching it, however, and was 
led into the corridor on the same floor (which was 
identical in structure with the floor on which her 
ward was located), she believed it to be the floor 
where her ward was. She then walked through the 
corridor as if she were on the ward floor and turned 
to the right at the end of the corridor as though she 
were about to enter her sleeping room. She was sur- 
prised to find herself in a room unknown to her. 
When told that she was on the wrong floor she be- 
came perplexed and looked around but was unable 
to find the correct way to the ward. She not only 
was ignorant of where she was but did not know how 
to return to the elevator. When, on another occa- 
sion, she was allowed to go straight to the ward, she 
did it in the same correct way as on her trip to the 
workroom. Plainly, she was able to take a compli- 
cated path in the same way as a normal person, but 
she failed immediately when the task demanded that 
she give herself an account of it that is, of rela- 
tions in space, the way from one place to another, 
etc. This may be deduced also from the fact that she 
could not describe the route, although she had fol- 
lowed it correctly. 

We find in patients of this kind a similar modifica- 
tion of their attitude toward time; that is, they can 
tell us about certain aspects of temporal things, but 
they do not really know what they mean. They can- 
not really distinguish between different durations; 



48 HUMAN NATURE 

they do not understand the meaning of longer and 
shorter time. So far as their behavior is concerned, 
indeed, one would get the impression that they are 
quite at home in matters of chronology. For example, 
one patient was required repeatedly to present him- 
self for an examination at four o'clock. He had a 
journey of three-quarters of an hour from his house 
to the hospital. He always arrived with the greatest 
punctuality. How did he manage it? He knew it 
would take him forty-five minutes. He knew that in 
order to be at the hospital at four o'clock he must 
leave his house at a quarter past three. This knowl- 
edge was conveyed to him by a certain position of 
the hands of his watch, without his knowing or need- 
ing to take into account their meaning in a general 
way. 

Though such patients show an apparently normal 
ability to use a watch, nonetheless they have no sense 
of time at all. This is revealed by a simple test, such 
as asking them to say where the minute hand of a 
clock is at a certain time for example, at thirteen 
minutes past four o'clock. A normal person would 
immediately say, "Slightly beyond the hour figure 
two." Our patients could not give a description at 
all, or could reach it only when allowed to point at 
the minutes from sixty to thirteen. 

As a further example from another performance 
field we may choose a simple reaction test. The 
patient is instructed to execute a simple movement 
in response to an abruptly flashed light signal. After 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 49 

some practice he learns the situation. He reacts cor- 
rectly in a relatively short time. We now flash a red 
light, then a blue light ; and the patient is instructed 
to execute the movement on seeing the red light but 
to do nothing on seeing the blue. In this and similar 
selective reactions his performance is inadequate. 
He seems to become confused, and either does not 
react at all or makes many errors. What is the 
difference between the two tests? In one the patient 
has to react in a simple way to a simple stimulus. 
His behavior is simple and directly determined by the 
stimulus. In the second test he has to choose. This 
means that he has to face two possibilities; in other 
words, he has to transcend the given situation, and 
here is the very thing he cannot do. 

These and similar examples show that the patient 
is unable to deal with any merely "possible" situa- 
tion at all. Thus we may also describe the deficiency 
in these patients as a lack 'of capacity for approach- 
ing a "possible 7 ' situation. 

Results with another task in quite a different field 
yield confirmation. A simple story is read to the 
patient. He seems unable to understand it. He may 
repeat some single words, but he does not understand 
their meaning and is unable to grasp the essential 
point. Now we read him another story, which would 
seem to a normal person to be no easier to under- 
stand. This time he understands the meaning very 
well and recounts the chief points. What was the 
difference between the two stories? The first one 



SO HUMAN NATURE 

dealt with a simple situation, but a situation which 
had no connection with the actual environment of 
the patient. The second story had a direct bearing 
on his own situation. Again we observe that the 
failure is due to an incapacity to approach a situation 
presented only in imagination. Choosing stories with 
this point of view, we are able to predict beforehand 
which ones the patient will be able to understand. 

The same difficulty is observable in tests with 
graphic representations. Pictures of single objects 
are almost always recognized. In pictures which con- 
tain a number of things and persons in contact wit? 
each other, the patient may pick out some details, but 
he is unable to understand the picture as a whole anc 
is unable to react in response to the whole. A precise 
examination reveals that the patient's real under- 
standing does not depend on the greater or smaller 
number of components in a picture but on whether 
the components, whatever their number, hang to- 
gether concretely and in ways familiar to him, 01 
whether an understanding of their connection re- 
quires a more abstract synthesis on his part. In the 
first case the patient may apprehend pictures witt 
many details. In the second he may lack under- 
standing even if there are only a few details. If the 
picture does not reveal its essence directly, by bring- 
ing the patient into the situation which it represents 
he is not able to recognize it. Thus one may charac- 
terize the deficiency as an inability to discover the 
essence of a situation. 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 51 

This change in behavior finds its expression in 
characteristic changes in memory and attention. 
Under certain circumstances the faculty for the re- 
production of facts acquired long ago may be normal. 
For example, things learned in school may be recalled 
very well in some situations, but not in all. The 
situation must reawaken old impressions. The pa- 
tient must be able to regard the present situation in 
such a way that facts from the past belong to it. If 
this is not the case, he is completely unable to recall 
facts which he has reproduced very well in another 
situation. Repeated observation in many different 
situations demonstrates clearly that such memory 
failures are not caused by an impairment of memory 
content but by a failure in the approach that is 
requisite for a specific test. The patient has the ma- 
terial in his memory, but he is unable to use it freely; 
he can use it only in connection with a definite con- 
crete situation, to which it must seem to him to be- 
long. Only in this way, too, is he able to learn new 
facts. He may be able to learn numbers, syllables, 
or movements by heart ; he is able to hold in memory 
situations, facts connected with his environment, and 
so on, but he is able to do so only in a concrete situa- 
tion, and he can reproduce them only in the situation 
in which he learned them. 

That such patients keep in mind essentially those 
patterns which they are able to comprehend that 
is, grasp in a concrete way the following simple 
example may illustrate. We put before a patient a 



52 HUMAN NATURE 

single vertical line, or a circle or a square alone. She 
is able to copy each figure. Now we present the 
vertical line, the circle, and the square together. 
When asked to reproduce the patterns a minute later, 
the patient draws only the square; the others she 
has not held in mind. She apparently remembers 
only the one among several patterns which is a con- 
crete figure for her that is, the square, which she 
interprets as a window of a church. Obviously, her 
memory of an object is determined by the concrete- 
ness or abstractness of the object in question. Her 
ability to copy pictures is not bad if the pictures are 
seen by her as concrete figures. 

We arrive at the same result in testing attention. 
At one time the patient appears inattentive, at an- 
other attentive, even abnormally so. Attention is 
usually weak in special examinations, particularly at 
the beginning, before the patient has gained the real 
approach to the whole situation. In such a situation 
he ordinarily seems much distracted. If he enters 
into the situation, however, his attention may be 
satisfactory, sometimes even abnormally keen. Under 
these circumstances he may be totally untouched 
by other stimuli from the environment to which 
normal persons will react unfailingly. His attitude, 
in short, depends upon whether he is equal to the 
task set him or not. In some tests he will always 
seem distracted for example, in those which de- 
mand a change of approach (a choice reaction), 
because he is incapable of making a choice. Conse- 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 53 

quently, it is not correct to speak of a change of 
attention in these patients in terms of plus or minus. 
The state of the patient's attention is but a part of 
his total behavior and is to be understood only in 
connection with it. 

The lack of an ability to grasp the abstract impairs 
all voluntary activities. Our patients have the great- 
est difficulty in starting any performance which is 
not determined directly by external stimuli. Thus, 
for example, they may be unable to recite the series 
of numbers on demand, although they are able to do 
it if the examiner begins the series. This difficulty 
finds its expression in a marked lack of initiative. 
They have great trouble in voluntary shifting, in 
switching over voluntarily from one topic to another, 
or from one part of a situation to another. Conse- 
quently they fail in performances in which such a 
shift is necessary. Since, as we have shown, they 
are hindered in the making of choices, they are un- 
able to follow a conversation between various people, 
especially if the contents change, and they seem 
rigid and lifeless, mentally and bodily, in everything 
they do. 

This difficulty in voluntary shifting can be ex- 
plained in the following way. Shifting presupposes 
that I have in mind simultaneously the object to 
which I am reacting at the moment and the one to 
which I am going to react. One is in the foreground, 
the other in the background. But it is essential that 
the object in the background be there as a possible 



54 HUMAN NATURE 

object for future reaction. Only then can I change 
from the one to the other. This presupposes the 
capacity for approaching things that are only im- 
agined, "possible 77 things, things which are not given 
in the concrete situation. If, for example, we nor- 
mal people do not understand a complicated picture 
immediately, we voluntarily look first at this and 
then at that part; we keep changing our attitude until 
we achieve success. This changing presupposes the 
capacity for freeing oneself from a concrete situation 
and turning to something that is already in mind. 
The mentally sick man is incapable of doing either 
because of his inability to grasp what is abstract. 

To be sure, we normal people do not always shift 
in an arbitrary manner. Shifting may be directed 
by the changing significance of one part or another 
for the best and most adequate performance, and 
this happens somewhat passively. But if the situa- 
tion itself does not bring about this change we can 
focus voluntarily upon one part or another. Normal 
performances usually demand both active and pas- 
sive shifting. Among the abnormal, the incapacity 
for voluntary shifting makes the fulfillment of cer- 
tain tasks impossible. 

We have already mentioned the fact that our pa- 
tients are unable to imitate or copy anything that is 
not a part of their immediate concrete experience. 
It is a very interesting expression of this incapacity 
that they have the greatest difficulty in repeating a 
sentence which is meaningless for them that is, 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 55 

the contents of which do not correspond to the 
reality they are capable of grasping. Thus a patient 
of mine was unable to repeat such sentences as "The 
snow is black." I was able to induce him to repeat 
the individual words, isolated, and then to repeat 
the words one after the other in the correct succes- 
sion, but he stopped before he spoke the word 
"black," looked startled, and said, "white," or, if he 
said the word "black," he did it very quickly and 
apparently with great uneasiness, and then said very 
quickly afterwards, "white." To say such things 
apparently requires the assumption of a very difficult 
attitude. It demands, so to speak, the ability to live 
in two spheres, the concrete sphere where "real" 
things take place and the non-concrete, the merely 
"possible" sphere, for in saying meaningless things 
we must shift from one to the other. This the patient 
is unable to do. He can live and act only in the con- 
crete sphere. He is therefore always himself. He is 
unable to place himself in the situation of other 
people; he is not able to imitate other people, nor 
is he able to impersonate as an actor is. 

His inability to put himself in another's place finds 
its expression in certain characteristics of his emo- 
tional and social behavior. He frequently exhibits a 
dulling of the emotions, but in other situations he 
does not appear to be without feeling; on the con- 
trary, we observe in him a great excitability. If we 
analyze both situations carefully, we find that the 
presence or absence of emotional expression corre- 



56 HUMAN NATURE 

spends to his entire behavior in a given situation, 
and that his emotional behavior is best understood 
in terms of his attitude toward the situation. The 
fact seems to be this: If the patient does not seem 
to react emotionally in a satisfactory way, it is in 
situations in which he also fails to comprehend the 
essentials to which a definite feeling attaches. This 
frequently demands a grasp of the abstract. He may 
have grasped only a part of the situation because 
only that part could be grasped concretely. His 
reaction seems inappropriate to us because we regard 
the whole situation and not merely a part of it. If 
we consider his behavior from this point of view, we 
see that, in the situation as it is experienced by him, 
his feeling is not abnormal. 

This also helps us to understand why it is that a 
patient who appears very dull may suddenly become 
excited in a situation which at first seems to contain 
no cause for irritation. For example, a patient of 
mine had a friend who was his close companion. 
One day the 'friend went to a cinema with another 
man. He did not take our patient because the latter 
had seen the picture before and would not go to see 
it a second time. When the friend came back our 
patient was in a state of great excitement and refused 
to speak to him. He was not to be quieted by any 
arguments. No explanation- that his friend did 
not want to offend him, that his friendship had not 
changed made any impression. From that time 
on, our patient was his old friend's enemy. 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 57 

This reaction, at first so unintelligible, can be 
understood if we remember that the patient was able 
to make only a direct concrete approach to any 
situation. This was the case in his approach to his 
friend. He saw only that his friend was the com- 
panion of another man, and he felt himself slighted. 
He was unable to understand that his friend's con- 
duct in no way actually affected their relations. He 
could not understand why his friend went without 
him, and he could not perceive the situation as a 
whole. He saw only the concrete separation between 
himself and his friend, and his exaggeration is thor- 
oughly understandable if we consider how difficult 
it is, in the case of such a change of attitude, to enter 
into the relation of friendship. The patient felt his 
loneliness, and sank into a "catastrophic situation" 
of confusion and anxiety.* He regarded his friend as 
the cause of his bad condition and reacted to him in 
a way that is easily understandable in terms of his 
grasp of the situation. 

It is in general very difficult for our patients to 
come into close contact with other people. They do 
not try to become intimate friends with other persons 
or to mingle in society; as a rule they live in an iso- 
lated way. Only a concrete situation by which they 
are affected brings them into and keeps them in con- 
tact with others; then their feelings may correspond 
to normal feelings. Outside the actual situation, 
however, they may be without any inner contact with 

* Cf . p. 86. 



58 HUMAN NATURE 

the members of their society. An example may make 
this clear. One of our patients never seemed to be 
concerned about his family. He never spoke of his 
wife or children, was unresponsive when we ques- 
tioned him about them, and when it was suggested 
to him that he should write to his family was utterly 
indifferent. Thus he appeared to lack all feeling. 
Now it was an established practice that at times he 
should visit his home, which was situated in another 
town, and stay there several days. While at home 
he conducted himself, as we learned, like a normal 
man in the bosom of his family. He was kind and 
affectionate to his wife and children, and interested 
in their affairs in so far as his abilities would permit. 
Yet after his return to the hospital from such a visit, 
upon being asked about his people, he would smile 
in an embarrassed way and give evasive answers; 
he seemed utterly estranged from his home situation. 
Unquestionably what ailed this man was not really a 
deterioration of his character on the emotional and 
moral side. Rather, he could not represent the home 
situation to himself, and consequently the corre- 
sponding feelings did not arise. This lack of real 
contact with others, taken in connection with the 
impairment of a grasp of the abstract, will give us a 
basis for our discussion of the social relationship in 
normal persons. 

We have characterized the patient's deficiency in 
different terms as lack of a grasp of the abstract, 
lack of an approach to imagined things, inability to 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 59 

give himself an account of his own acting or think- 
ing, inability to make a separation between the ego 
and the world, and lack of freedom. At bottom all 
these terms, and others which one may use to char- 
acterize the facts, mean basically the same thing. 
We speak, in brief, of the lack of an attitude toward 
the abstract. 6 

To avoid misunderstanding, let me say here that 
the perception of concreteness by different patients 
need not be expressed in the same way in a given 
task. What is concrete for one individual can only 
be understood within the frame of reference for that 
particular patient, as it is related to his pre-morbid 
individuality and his changed capacity and the situ- 
ation given. Therefore it may express itself in dif- 
ferent ways in different patients with the same type 
of lesion. 

I know that the designation of the two kinds of 
behavior as "abstract" and "concrete" is misunder- 
standable and has often been misunderstood. I am 
sorry that I do not know any more appropriate words 
with which to characterize the facts. Now I am very 
anxious not to be misunderstood at this point be- 
cause what I am about to say concerns the most 
important problem in our attempt to characterize 
human nature on the basis of our findings. 

Thus I should like to review briefly what has been 
said. Tn "concrete" performances a reaction is deter- 
mined directly by a stimulus, is awakened by all 
that the individual perceives. The individual's pro- 



60 HUMAN NATURE 

cedure is somewhat passive, as if it were not he who 
had the initiative. In "abstract" performances an 
action is not determined directly and immediately 
by a stimulus configuration but by the account of the 
situation which the individual gives to himself. The 
performance is thus more a primary action than a 
mere reaction, and it is a totally different way of 
coming to terms with the outside world. The indi- 
vidual has to consider the situation from various 
aspects, pick out the aspect which is essential, and 
act in a way appropriate to the whole situation. 
True, this procedure may have various degrees of 
complexity. Sometimes the situation demands noth- 
ing more than a singling out of one property of an 
object, as, for instance, when we are asked to sort 
objects according to their colors. In the highest 
degree of complexity we have not only to apprehend 
objects by means of certain simple characteristics 
but to choose aspects for consideration in accordance 
with a certain task which demands a conceptual 
organization. Even in its simplest form, however, 
abstraction is separate in principle from concrete 
behavior. There is no gradual transition from the 
one to the other. The assumption of an attitude 
toward the abstract is not more complex merely 
through the addition of a new factor of determina- 
tion; it is a totally different activity of the organism. 
Perhaps it would be better not to designate both 
conditions by the term "behavior," since behavior 
connotes real activity and is especially well suited 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 6 1 

to the concrete performance. Abstraction represents, 
rather, a preparation for activity; it involves an atti- 
tude, i.e., an inner approach, which leads to activity. 
Therefore it is better to speak of an attitude toward 
the abstract. Real action is never abstract; it is 
always concrete. The difference between the two 
conditions is shown in the difference between the 
processes which precede action. In the concrete situ- 
ation action is set going directly by the stimuli; in 
the situation involving the abstract, action is begun 
after preparation which has to do with a consideration 
of the whole situation. 

Yet these explanations are not entirely correct. 
From them it might seem as if concrete behavior 
could take place in complete independence of the ab- 
stract attitude, determined by the external situation 
alone. This, however, is not the case. The arousal 
and the normal course of an action presuppose in 
any case an abstract attitude. In normal life we are 
rarely forced into action by the stimulus situation 
itself. Usually we have to place ourselves at least 
in imagination in the appropriate situation. The 
outside world merely gives us the impulse to do 
this. Thus even the initiation of an action demands 
the abstract attitude. Nor is the latter entirely ex- 
cluded during the performance of a concrete act. On 
the contrary, the concrete performance is always 
somewhat dependent upon the abstract attitude, 
which becomes effective in restoring order as soon 
as any disturbance in the normal course of concrete 



62 HUMAN NATURE 

performances occurs. Thus concrete performances 
are grounded upon the abstract attitude in their 
initiation and receive its regulative control during 
their course. 

This is very evident in our patients. Their con- 
crete behavior can begin only if it is stimulated by 
the outer world, and it is to an abnormal degree 
dependent upon the outer world. It runs in an 
abnormal, compulsive way, and is disturbed very 
easily by changes in external events. It lacks spon- 
taneity and, so to speak, an adequate context 
within the individual. 

From what we have said it is clear that normally 
we do not distinguish sharply between performances 
carried out on the basis of the abstract attitude 
and those carried out in a concrete way. Normal 
performance demands both kinds of behavior. If 
I stress the importance of the abstract attitude for 
normal human beings, I do not mean that normal 
performances or even the larger part of them 
are carried out only in the abstract way. In or- 
dinary life concrete behavior plays a very great 
role; most of our everyday performances are of this 
sort. Many performances consist of parts, some 
of which demand the one, others the other behavior. 

Whether abstract attitude or concrete behavior 
plays a more prominent role depends upon various 
factors first, on the situation. There are situa- 
tions in which most normal persons react in a very 
concrete way without thinking about their behavior. 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 63 

A person enters his bedroom in the evening and puts 
on the light without realizing that he is doing so. 
Here and in similar cases our actions are determined 
directly by stimuli. But even here we do not act 
without employing an abstract attitude to a certain 
extent. We are acting somewhat passively, but we 
are not forced to act in this way. Under certain 
conditions we can go to bed without putting on the 
light if, for instance, we want to avoid disturbing 
someone else. This shows that, even where we react 
in a very concrete direct way, our actions are de- 
termined somewhat by our general mental set that 
is, by some abstract attitude. Thus even in very 
familiar everyday actions we have to deal with 
a combination of abstract and concrete behavior. 

The same is the case in activities of such high 
rank as scientific and artistic work. Perfection in 
any field demands the concrete execution of at least 
some parts of our actions without our thinking about 
them. Thinking itself is very often just such a 
concrete process; one thought involuntarily brings 
about another. T'he same is true in artistic expres- 
sion. In all productivity concrete action plays a very 
great role. We must stress the point, however, that 
productive action is never possible unless it is 
embedded in an abstract set. The importance 
of concrete behavior in artistic creativeness has 
perhaps been overemphasized. Creative work can 
never be produced without an ideational basis 
that is, without the abstract attitude. In this respect 



64 HUMAN NATURE 

nothing in our patients is so impressive as their 
lack of productiveness. 

In this connection it may be said that any com- 
parison of the artistic products of abnormal persons 
with those of normal artists, however many the 
similarities, have a very uncertain basis. 7 In any 
case, we ought to be much more careful in our 
judgments about the artistic products of the insane 
than we have often been. The point must be 
stressed that the products in question stem mainly 
from schizophrenics, and as a result of new investi- 
gations by Vigotski, Hanfmann and Kasanin, Bolles 
and Goldstein, we now know that schizophrenics suf- 
fer from an impairment of the abstract attitude. 

The role which this attitude plays in the life of an 
individual depends further upon the latter's individ- 
ual organization, his constitutional and mental type. 
There are some persons who are more strongly 
directed toward the concrete than the abstract, and 
others who prefer by nature to assume an abstract 
attitude in all their doings. Thus one may easily 
arrive at a wrong judgment about the importance of 
the abstract attitude for human behavior by the 
observation that very intelligent people seem to 
behave very concretely. Behavior in performance 
tests provides a case in point. Take, for example, 
the following simple test, which I devised for this 
purpose with the material of the Kohs blocks. 8 

The subject is faced with various simple designs 
and is asked to reproduce them with cubes, each cube 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 65 

having a different color on each side. The cubes are 
of the same size as the entire design. Thus the prod- 
uct built up from the blocks is four times as big as 
the model. On first looking at the models one is im- 
pressed by certain figures which stand out, and one 
may try to reproduce them. With this procedure, 
however, one can be at most only partially successful. 
One has to abstract from the outstanding figures, 
divide the model in imagination into squares cor- 
responding to the blocks, and copy the divided pic- 
tures. Our patients fail in various ways because of 
the impairment of their ability to abstract: they 
cannot abstract from the size or from the figures 
given, and they are not able to divide the model into 
squares in imagination. Now we sometimes observe 
in normal people behavior similar to that of our 
patients. Sometimes it takes a long time before a 
subject gets the idea of dividing the model in imagi- 
nation, and sometimes the examiner has to demon- 
strate the successful procedure. This may suggest 
that intelligent normal persons, like our patients, are 
very concrete in their reactions and that the capacity 
for abstracting cannot be so essential as we have 
asserted. Yet there is one great difference between 
these normal persons and our patients which shows 
that such assumption is wrong. Immediately after a 
demonstration by the examiner the normal individual 
is able to continue in the correct way. This proves 
that he has grasped the abstract method and is fol- 
lowing it. But a demonstration of the abstract 



66 HUMAN NATURE 

method does not help our patients at all. They really 
lack the abstract attitude which normal persons 
possess. Although normal persons may have a tend- 
ency to behave primarily in the concrete manner 
and often begin in this way, they can shift very 
easily to the other mode of procedure and so gain the 
insight that is necessary for success. 

Thus these and similar observations of normal 
people do not affect our conception of the significance 
of the abstract attitude; they show only that there 
are two types of normal persons one that prefers 
the more coricrste behavior, and another that prefers 
the abstract. This difference reveals a characteristic 
which has s to be taken into consideration in any 
analysis of the structure of the personality, but it 
does not reveal any essential difference in the or- 
ganization of various human beings. We shall have 
to come back to these differences in personality 
when we speak about the structure of the personality. 

Normal behavior is characterized by an alterna- 
tion between an attitude involving abstract and one 
involving concrete behavior, and this alternation is 
appropriate to the situation and the individuality, 
to the task for which the organism is set. If either 
attitude becomes independent and governs the be- 
havior of a normal person too completely, then we 
are faced with an anomalous form of behavior. This 
we shall discuss later. 

To the characteristic deviation of behavior from 
the normal shown in the various examples I have 



PATHOLOGY AND MAN'S NATURE 67 

given, there naturally corresponds a change in the 
world in which the patient lives. We may say that the 
patient has no world at all outside himself and op- 
posed to him, in the sense that we do: he is impaired 
in his capacity for separating himself from the world 
which surrounds him; he is embedded in his own 
world. His inability to achieve performances which 
demand an abstract attitude means not only a shrink- 
age of his personality but also a shrinkage of the 
world in which he lives. In addition, not only are the 
contents of his environment diminished, and his own 
capacities shrunken, but there is a decrease in his 
freedom of action. 

Perhaps we are now justified in drawing some 
conclusions as to the structure of the normal human 
being. We may start from this point: In the type of 
cases we have used as a basis for our discussion we 
never observe that an impairment of concrete be- 
havior occurs while the attitude toward the abstract 
remains intact. The attitude toward the abstract is 
always impaired first, and to a higher degree. Now 
we may assume that those capacities which are first 
impaired by a brain lesion are those which demand 
the best functioning of the most complicated sub- 
stratum of the brain. Thus it is not accidental that 
we find the loss of this capacity especially in lesions 
of the frontal lobe, which we consider to be the most 
complex part of the human brain. Further, we may 
assume that the performances corresponding to the 
best functioning of the most complex part of the 



68 HUMAN NATURE 

brain are the most important that is, represent 
the highest capacity of the organism in question. 
Thus we are led to the conclusion that we must dis- 
tinguish in the human being two types of behavior, 
the concrete and the abstract, and that abstract 
behavior represents the highest capacity in fact, 
the essential capacity of the human being. 



Ill 

THE ABSTRACT ATTITUDE 
AND SPEECH 

THE IMPAIRMENT of the abstract attitude is clearly 
revealed in characteristic changes in the speech of 
patients with brain lesions. We know various forms 
of speech defects in such patients and usually class 
them together as aphasia. 1 No other pathological 
material can teach us so much about the organization 
of the human being. Since we cannot deal with all 
the various types of aphasia, I shall confine the dis- 
cussion to a special form, known as amnesic aphasia, 2 
which in my opinion is particularly well suited to give 
us an insight into the nature of man. 

If one examines a patient with this type of aphasia 
one observes as a striking symptom that he is totally 
or partially unable to find names for concrete things. 
This is especially noticeable in cases where he has 
the task of naming presented objects, but it is also 
apparent in his spontaneous language, which is con- 
spicuously lacking in nouns and verbs. Usually this 
symptom is considered as the characteristic change, 
but closer examination shows that other changes also 
occur. Many circumlocutions are used where we 
would use single words. A patient shown a cup, foi 
example, may respond with, "This is for drinking/' 



70 HUMAN NATURE 

or say, on seeing a penholder, "That is for writing/' 
etc. In another case, a patient of mine said, "That 
is something for the rain," in a situation in which 
we should merely say, "That is an umbrella." Or 
she said: "I must have it for the rain/' or, "I have 
three umbrellas at home." In the last sentence she 
used the right word in her periphrasis, yet she was 
unable to repeat it in reply to a repeated question, 
"What is that?" soon afterward. Evidently such a 
patient has not lost the word itself but for some rea- 
son is unable to use it in naming an object. Further, 
his entire behavior shows peculiarities. All his acting 
and thinking seems to center, to an unusual degree, 
around his own personality and its relation to the 
world. He is acting in the world rather than think- 
ing or speaking about it. His speech is accompanied 
to a marked degree by expressive movements. Very 
often we observe that he seems unable to express his 
meaning by words but can do so quite well by move- 
ments. 

The change involving the whole behavior appears 
still more strikingly in special examinations. I shall 
begin by presenting the results of one examination 
with a sorting test because the results seem particu- 
larly well suited to carry us into the core of our 
problem, namely, the basic change in patients with 
amnesic aphasia. 

We place before the patient a heap of colored 
woolen skeins Holmgren's well-known samples 
used for testing color efficiency. We ask him to pick 



ABSTRACT ATTITUDE AND SPEECH 71 

out all the red skeins and put them together. (There 
are, of course, many different shades of red.) Or we 
pick out one particular skein for example, a dark 
red one and ask him to choose strands of the 
same and similar colors. 

In the first task a normal person with good color 
efficiency usually selects a great number of different 
shades of the same ground color that is, for ex- 
ample, different reds, without regard to intensity, 
purity, lightness, etc. In the same task patients with 
amnesic aphasia behave quite differently, and exhibit 
varying types of behavior. For example, when he is 
told to choose all the skeins that are similar to a 
given skein, one patient chooses only skeins of the 
very same or of a closely similar shade. Though 
urged to go on he chooses a small number because 
there are only a few very similar ones in the heap. 
Another patient matches a given bright shade of red 
with a blue skein of similar brightness. At first such 
a patient may seem to be color-blind, but it can be 
demonstrated beyond doubt that his color efficiency 
is normal and that he is able to differentiate very 
distinctly between colors that are much alike. More 
precise observations disclose that in this case the 
choice is determined by a particular color attribute of 
the given skein, its brightness. We observe, further, 
that the choice may be decided by a number of dif- 
ferent attributes at one time by brightness, at 
another by softness, or coldness, warmth, etc. How- 
ever and this is a very amazing thing a patient 



72 HUMAN NATURE 

who seems to be choosing according to a certain at- 
tribute is not able to follow this procedure voluntarily 
if it is demanded of him that is, if he is asked to 
choose only bright skeins, etc. Further, we observe 
that he does not seem to be able to hold to a certain 
procedure. He has chosen, for instance, some bright 
skeins. Suddenly he begins selecting on the basis of 
another attribute the coldness of the color or some 
other factor. In another case, the patient arranges 
the skeins as if guided by a scale of brightness. He 
begins with a very bright red, then adds one less 
bright, and so on to a dull one. But if we ask him to 
place the skeins in a succession according to their 
brightness he shows himself incapable of the per- 
formance, even if it is demonstrated to him. 

To understand the behavior of our patients, it is 
necessary to examine the procedure of normal per- 
sons in such tasks. If we normal persons want to 
choose a color, we select various nuances, even 
though we see that they have various attributes not 
equal to one another, because we recognize that they 
belong together in respect to their basic quality. The 
several shades are merely examples of this quality, 
and we treat the skeins not as different individual 
things but as representatives of that one basic color. 
For the moment we ignore all differences in shade 
and disregard all singular attributes. We are able to 
do this because we can abstract and because we can 
hold fast to a procedure once initiated. 

There is another approach, however, which is open 



ABSTRACT ATTITUDE AND SPEECH 73 

to the normal person. We can start with one particu- 
lar skein and move it about over the heap, passively 
surrendering ourselves to the impressions that 
emerge. Then either of two things will take place. 
If we find skeins resembling our sample in all at- 
tributes, all these immediately cohere in a unitary 
sensory experience with the sample. If we find 
skeins which match our sample in some respects, we 
experience a characteristic unrest concerning the 
heap, and an alternating sense of relationship be- 
tween skeins in the heap and the sample, according 
to different attributes. No matter whether we experi- 
ence rivalry or matching, the coherence we feel re- 
sults directly from sense data and takes place pas- 
sively; we do not experience a definite attitude toward 
any attribute. 

There is an essential difference between the more 
passive kind of approach and the former, in which 
we definitely choose a particular color. In the one, 
a definite ordering principle determines our actions; 
in the other, there is no such principle, and our actions 
are passively determined by outer impressions. These 
two kinds of behavior correspond to what we have 
called abstract and concrete behavior and what we 
may now call categorical and concrete behavior. 

A particular kind of language belongs to each of 
these types of behavior. Our behavior is abstract 
when we give a name to an object. When we speak 
of "table" we do not mean a special given table with 
all its accidential properties; we mean table in gen- 



74 HUMAN NATURE 

eral. The word is used as a representative of the 
category "table" even when naming a particular 
table. Thus, if we are asked to group together all 
reds, upon hearing the word "red" we are immedi- 
ately prepared to select colors in a categorical fashion. 
In this approach language plays a great role, and 
the particular form it takes here may be designated 
by Karl Buehler's term, darstellende Sprache, which 
may be translated as "representative speech." 

In the second form of behavior language does not 
play much of a role at all. Our words merely accom- 
pany our acts and express a property of the object 
itself, like other properties, such as color, size, etc. 
This fact is shown in the particular kind of words 
we use in such situations. The words are especially 
adapted to the individuality of the given object. We 
use words like "rose-red," "violet"; we do not say 
"red," but "pink," "dark red," "strawberry-red," 
"sky-blue"; not green but "grass-green," etc. Often 
we have no word for naming a given object, and then 
we do it in a roundabout way. Words are used here 
less as representative of categories than as individual 
properties which, like other properties, belong to the 
object in question. We call such words "individual" 
words. 

Now when we consider the behavior of the patient 
in the light of these elucidations we may say that it 
is similar to the second approach of normal persons. 
He is able to assume only the more concrete, the 
more realistic, attitude. Therefore he chooses identi- 



ABSTRACT ATTITUDE AND SPEECH 75 

cal skeins or skeins which are similar in an outstand- 
ing property, such as brightness. This interpretation 
finds confirmation in the greater concreteness of the 
patient's general behavior, in the predominance of 
acting over thinking, in the accompaniment of speech 
by expressive movements. 

Our assumption is finally substantiated by the re- 
sults of another type of sorting test. If a normal 
person tries to arrange a number of objects lying 
before him say, on the writing table of a very 
busy man he may do it in various ways, according 
to various attitudes. He may arrange them by size, 
by color, by function, by the importance of their 
situation, in terms of activity, of thought, etc. 
Further, he is able both to shift from one attitude 
and one kind of order to another as the situation 
demands it, and to effect a particular arrangement 
on demand. A patient with amnesic aphasia, con- 
fronted with miscellaneous objects with the instruc- 
tion to group them, will exhibit the same behavior as 
in the color test. He is capable of proceeding only 
in a manner that indicates that he is guided by con- 
crete promptings. 

A particularly instructive example is the follow- 
ing. Among a number of different objects there 
were placed on a table before a patient a corkscrew 
and a bottle with a cork loosely set in its neck. The 
patient, asked to arrange these, did not put the bottle 
and the corkscrew together. Asked if these two ob- 
jects did not belong together, he said, "No," very 



76 HUMAN NATURE 

positively, backing his answer up with the explana- 
tion, "The bottle is already opened." Under these 
circumstances most normal people would pay no at- 
tention to the fact that the cork was not fast. For 
the immediate task the grouping together of ob- 
jects that belong together it is quite incidental 
and unimportant whether the cork is loose or fast. 
With the abstract attitude, in a form of sorting which 
involves grouping objects according to categories, 
we assume that bottle and corkscrew belong together, 
independently of their occurrence in any particular 
situation. But for the patient who is able to take the 
objects only as they are given in sense experience, 
the corkscrew does not belong to the bottle and the 
cork if the cork is already loose. From this and 
similar cases it is plain that he takes the concrete 
attitude toward objects as well we may say toward 
all objects, toward the world in its entirety. 

Our conclusion is that the patient's inability to 
lame objects is a consequence of his inability to as- 
sume the abstract attitude, for this is a prerequisite 
for the naming of objects. As we have shown in the 
example of the umbrella, he has not lost the words 
themselves, but he is unable to use them in situa- 
tions which demand their use as categories. Often a 
patient, asked to name a color presented to him, calls 
out over and over various color names: red, blue, 
yellow, etc. He may even utter the appropriate name, 
but in spite of this he is still unable to connect it with 
the color itself. Furthermore, it does not help him 



ABSTRACT ATTITUDE AND SPEECH 77 

when we say the different color names for him to 
repeat after us. 

But what makes these words unsuitable for use 
in connection with objects in the normal way that 
is, as names? Why can they not be used as symbols 
for objects? This may be disclosed in observations 
of patients who utter appropriate words in connec- 
tion with some objects but, as closer analysis shows, 
do not use them in a normal categorical fashion. 
Here we learn that the patients have the same con- 
crete attitude toward the words that they have toward 
objects they are asked to sort. 
/ Asked to mention the names of several different 
Kinds of animals, the patient may be at first unable 
to do so. In one case it was not until we had given 
a patient such examples as dog, cat, mouse, that she 
replied to the question at all. Then suddenly she 
said: "A polar bear; a brown bear; a lion; a tiger." 
Asked why she named these particular animals, she 
said, "If we enter the zoological gardens, we come at 
first to the polar bear- and then to the other animals." 3 
Obviously she had recalled the animals as they were 
situated in the zoological gardens, and had used the 
words only as belonging to the concrete situation, 
not as names for objects. It was very characteristic 
that she did not simply say "hfi^r," a word which 
represents the category of all bears, and which we 
would use when asked to name animals, but that 
instead she selected the words "polar bear," "brown 
bear." The same fact appeared when the patient 



78 HUMAN NATURE 

was asked to recite different female first names. She 
said: "Crete, Paula, Clara, Martha/ 7 and, asked why 
she had mentioned these particular names, answered, 

"These are all G s" (G was her family 

name), and went on, "One sister died of a heart 
neurosis." The last sentence demonstrates very 
clearly that the patient did not recite names but 
only uttered words which belonged to a particular 
concrete situation, namely, to her family situation. 

How very concretely such words are apprehended 
may be demonstrated by the following example. 
When, to such a patient of ours, a knife was offered 
with a pencil, she called the knife a "pencil sharp- 
ener"; when the knife was offered with an apple, it 
was to her an "apple parer"; when offered with a 
potato, it was a "potato peeler"; in company with 
a piece of bread, it became a "bread knife"; and 
with a fork it was "knife and fork." The word 
"knife" alone she never uttered spontaneously, and 
when she was asked, "Could we not always call it 
simply 'knife?' " she replied promptly, "No." 

With different mental sets the same word may 
mean for the normal person different things. For 
example, in German the word Anhdnger is used for 
a lavalier which hangs on a chain around a girPs 
neck, or for a follower of a personage, or for the 
second car which is customarily attached to a street- 
car in Germany. Our patient was unable to use the 
word in more than one sense or in connection with 
more than one object. If she understood the word in 



ABSTRACT ATTITUDE AND SPEECH 79 

a particular sense she could not understand that it 
could be used in another sense. This observation 
shows clearly that the words themselves are quali- 
tatively different for such patients as compared with 
normal people, by whom the same word can be used 
for various totally different objects. By patients 
with amnesic aphasia they can be used only in a con- 
crete way, for they seem to have lost the character- 
istic that is necessary if they are to be used in a 
categorical sense that is, as symbols. They may 
be useful as properties belonging to a definite object, 
but they have become unfit to serve as symbols for 
ideas. They have lost their meaning. 

It has usually been assumed, even by those authors 
who recognize that these patients have lost the cate- 
gorical attitude toward objects, that the cause of this 
lack is the loss of words, or a difficulty in evoking 
words. This cannot be the case. There is no doubt 
that words provide a very important means of 
helping us to assume the categorical attitude and of 
stabilizing concepts, but, as we have explained, our 
patients have not really lost the words. Instead, the 
words have lost their character of being usable in 
the abstract, and this change in language is only one 
expression of the basic change in our patients, the 
lack of the capacity to create any sort of abstraction. 

These observations are important for understand- 
ing the character of the capacity for naming objects. 
This apparently simple performance does not repre- 
sent a superficial connection between a thing and a 



80 HUMAN NATURE 

word; naming objects presupposes the abstract atti- 
tude and is an expression of a very high mental func- 
tion. But these observations reveal another point 
still more important for our discussion. They show 
that speech is one of the essential characteristics of 
human nature, inasmuch as it is tied to man's highest 
capacity, the capacity for abstract behavior. 

Another significant point appears. The patients 
we have been discussing have not lost the capacity 
to use words in a concrete way, and from the advan- 
tage this type of speech gives them we can infer 
what role it may play in normal life. 

A patient of minelcould name pure colors with 
their respective color names red, blue, and so on 
but she declined to extend the same word to the 
everal shades of a given color. The words were at 
her disposal only as individual, concrete things be- 
longing to definite objects. In the course of time, 
after repeated examinations, she came to call various 
shades by the same name; for instance, she would 
use the word "red" for all shades of red. Superficially 
she seemed to behave like a normal person. One 
might have thought that she had improved, that she 
had regained the meaning of the words. But it was 
not so. Asked why she now called all these different 
shades by the same word, she answered, "The doctors 
have told me that all these colors are named red. 
Therefore I call them all red." Asked if this was not 
correct, she laughed and said, "Not one of these 
colors is red, but I am told to call them by this word." 



ABSTRACT ATTITUDE AND SPEECH 8 1 

It is clear that she had not used the words as symbols 
but had learned to build a quite external connection 
between one word and a diversity of things, a quite 
meaningless connection, which, however, because she 
had a good memory, helped her to carry out a task, 
if only in a very external way. 

Thus we must distinguish very definitely between 
two ways of using words in connection with objects: 
real naming, which is an expression of the categorical 
attitude toward the world in general, and pseudo- 
naming of objects, which is simply a use of words 
held in memory. The incidence of this pseudo-naming 
depends on the extent of the individual's verbal pos- 
sessions. In it words are used as properties of objects 
just as other properties color, size, hue are 
used; they belong to concrete behavior. To this type 
of words belong the speech aul ^tisms of ordinary 
people the alphabet, > .imbe 1 ^ i*i series, the days 
of the week, and many otiitM longer or shorter speech 
expressions of everyday life. This use of words plays 
a great role in ordinary speech. In learning a for- 
eign language, for example, as long as we have no 
real conception of it as a language, we possess its 
words only by such superficial connections with the 
words of our own language. If we understand their 
meaning within the realm of the foreign language 
itself, then the words achieve an absolutely differ- 
ent character; then they become representative of 
a category. 

Important as these speech possessions are for our 



82 HUMAN NATURE 

everyday language, they obtain their significance 
only from their position against a background of 
representational, meaningful speech. This may be 
gathered from the fact that to a certain extent speech 
automatisms are developed only if a human being 
possesses the function of meaning. Certainly a child 
acquires many automatisms by repeated imitation 
of his own speech and that of others. If he is not 
able to use them later in connection with meaningful 
speech, however, his learning of these words is 
limited, and he forgets many that he has learned. 
We know that children with an inborn deficiency in 
the attitude toward the abstract are not able to de- 
velop speech automatisms to any extent, and that 
they forget them, in spite of a good memory, if the 
words are not practiced constantly. In the same 
way, patients with a loss of categorical behavior may 
lose their speech automatisms if they are not con- 
tinuously kept in use by the demands of concrete 
situations. Thus, for example, if the meaning of 
numbers is lost, these patients lose the ability to 
count and the knowledge of the simple multiplica- 
tion table, which are usually regarded as well-estab- 
lished possessions of memory. 

Speech automatisms may be designated as "tools," 
but it is false to consider language in general as a 
mere tool. Even speech automatisms are dependent 
upon the categorical attitude both in their building 
and in their use. This point is most important. The 
use of speech automatisms alone is not real language. 



ABSTRACT ATTITUDE AND SPEECH 83 

Our patients, despite their lack, of the categorical 
attitude, may be able to use speech automatisms 
which they acquired at a time when they were capable 
of the categorical attitude, but the fact that their 
speech lacks the spontaneity and fluidity which 
characterizes normal language, and that they are 
not able to use the words as symbols, demonstrates 
very clearly that language without a categorical 
background is not real language. Whenever human 
beings use language to establish natural connections 
between themselves and the world, particularly with 
their fellow men, language is not merely a tool. It 
is not merely a superficial means of communication, 
not a simple naming of objects through words; it 
represents a particular way of building up the world 
namely, by means of abstractions. "Language," 
said Wilhelm von Humboldt, "never represents ob- 
jects themselves but the concepts which the mind 
has formed of them in the autonomous activity by 
which it creates language." It is this that makes lan- 
guage so important, so essential to the development 
of a culture. It becomes a manifestation both of all 
that is human, the human being at his deepest, and 
of man's psychic bond with his fellows; in none of 
his culturafcreations does man reveal himself so fully 
as in the creation of language itself. It would be 
impossible for animals to create a language, because 
they do not have this conceptual approach toward 
the world. If they had, they would be not animals 
but human beings. Nothing brings this home to us 



84 HUMAN NATURE 

more strikingly than observing in patients with am- 
nesic aphasia the parallelism between the changes 
which occur in personality and the loss of the mean- 
ing of words. 



IV 

ORDERED AND CATASTROPHIC BE- 
HAVIOR: ANXIETY AND FEAR 

THE FOREGOING lectures have given us some insight 
into the organization of man by showing the con- 
sequences of the lack of the attitude toward the 
abstract. In this lecture we shall try to gain an 
understanding of the way in which men come to 
terms with the outside world. In discussing this im- 
portant problem we shall draw upon observations 
of our patients' ways of adapting themselves to the 
difficulties caused by their defects. 

Let us begin with the observation of the behavior 
of one of our patients in a task which seems very 
simple. 1 We give him a problem in simple arithmetic 
which before his sickness he would without any 
doubt have been able to solve. Now he is unable to 
solve it. But merely noticing and recording the fact 
that he is unable to perform a simple multiplication 
would be an exceedingly inadequate account of the 
patient's reaction. By simply looking at him we dis- 
cover a great deal more than his arithmetical failure. 
He looks dazed, changes color, becomes agitated and 
anxious, starts to fumble. A moment before, he was 
amiable; now he is sullen and evasive or exhibits 
temper. He presents a picture of a very much dis-" 



86 HUMAN NATURE 

tressed, frightened person, a person in a state of 
anxiety. It takes some time to restore him to a state 
which will permit the examination to continue. In 
the presence of a task which he can perform, the 
same patient behaves in exactly the opposite manner. 
He looks animated and calm, and appears to be in a 
good mood; he is well-poised and collected, inter- 
ested, cooperative; he is "all there." We may call 
the state of the patient in the situation of success 
ordered behavior ; his state in the situation of failure, 
disordered or catastrophic behavior? 

In the catastrophic condition the patient not only 
is incapable of performing the required task, which 
exceeds his impaired capacity, but he also fails, for 
a longer or shorter period, in performances which he 
is able to carry out in the ordered state. The whole 
organism is in great disorder for some time. Obser- 
vation of the patient over a longer period of time 
reveals that his behavior fluctuates between these two 
opposing states and that the catastrophic type of 
behavior appears very often in examinations. After 
a while the patient becomes calmer, and catastrophic 
situations more or less disappear, even if the dis- 
turbance of functions remains unaltered. In normal 
life as well, in his attempt to come to terms with the 
outer world, the individual has to go through such 
states of disorder or catastrophe. Thus, in our at- 
tempt to understand human nature we cannot fail 
to be much interested in scrutinizing the structure of 
the catastrophic condition in our patients and in 
learning how the abnormal person overcomes it. 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 87 

To begin with their structure, one might argue 
that ordered and catastrophic behavior represent the 
reactions of the individual to good and bad perform- 
ances. Such an assumption, however, fails to accord 
with the observation that the patient is very often 
unable to tell why he is restless, angry, afraid, nega- 
tivistic, and so on. Frequently usually, in fact 
he does not realize that the cause of his anxiety was 
a specific task which was demanded of him and to 
which he was not equal. We have already pointed 
out that our patients are especially disturbed in the 
capacity for giving themselves an account of what 
they are doing. Therefore we must be allowed to 
assume that they are unable to give themselves an 
account of the difficulty of the task required, of their 
failure, of the consequences which this failure may 
have, etc. Thus we may say that catastrophic be- 
havior is not simply a consequence of lacking the 
capacity to perform but rather belongs to the situa- 
tion of failing. The same is true in the case of or- 
dered behavior. It belongs to the situation of doing 
well. 

In order to make this clear we shall supplement 
our explanations by further comments on the func- 
tioning of the nervous system. 

We have already discussed the conditions under 
which the organism functions in a constant and or- 
dered way. We stressed especially the significance 
of the equalization process, which brings the organ- 
ism back to its average state of excitation.* What 

*See p. 15- 



88 HUMAN NATURE 

we call a normal performance or an appropriate 
reaction to a definite stimulus corresponds to an 
excitation pattern within this average zone of ex- 
citability. The maintenance of constancy in the 
actions of an organism depends on two conditions: 
(i) that the organism be nornial, and (2) that the 
external stimuli do not differ too strongly from the 
adequate stimuli, those suited to the organism con- 
cerned. 

What do we mean by the phrase "adequate stim- 
uli"? 3 We know the organism does not react to all 
stimuli in the same way. There are many events to 
which a particular organism is not sensitive. I need 
not mention the fact that every organism, including 
the human organism, is insensitive to stimuli to 
which other organisms react. Each has its special 
organization as to sensory equipment, etc., and usu- 
ally is responsive only to stimuli relevant to this, its 
"nature." As we shall see later, it is the basic tend- 
ency of the organism to actualize itself in accordance 
with its nature. All performances that can be ob- 
served are expressions of the activity of the organism 
in this direction. This actualization means existence, 
life. Normally the organism responds only to those 
stimuli which are "adequate" that is, relevant 
to its nature. Normal equalization is possible, and 
the organism is in a state of ordered behavior, only 
so long as it is not affected by inadequate stimuli; 
and only in this ordered state is it able to carry on 
the performances that correspond to its nature. 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 89 

Therefore to live in a milieu which allows for ordered 
behavior, which allows especially for normal equali- 
zation, is requisite for the organism's living at all. 
The proper milieu of the organism is not the entire 
environment but only that part with which it can 
come to terms in such a way that normal equalization 
is possible. Each organism has its own characteristic 
milieu. Only that, a certain segment of all that sur- 
rounds it, constitutes its world. We call this milieu 
the adequate milieu, that is, the milieu that is appro- 
priate to the nature of the organism. 4 Contact with 
it does not alter the organism in such a way that it 
becomes unable to realize its own nature. The stim- 
uli arising from it we call adequate stimuli. 

The very existence of the organism is tied up with 
the possibility of finding an adequate milieu within 
its environment. Normally, the adaptation of the 
organism to its environment that is, congruency 
between the two is developed to such a degree 
that existence is guaranteed. 

The organism ordinarily does not react at all to 
stimuli which are inadequate to it. Such stimuli can 
become effective only if they are very strong and 
force themselves upon the organism ; then it is driven 
into the catastrophic situation, not only because it is 
unable to react adequately but also because it is so 
shocked and disturbed in its functioning that, for a 
longer or shorter period, it is unable to react at all. 
This brings it into the danger of not being able to 
carry on even those performances which are essential 



90 HUMAN NATURE 

for its existence, and in this sense we may consider 
catastrophic behavior as a threat to the existence of 
the organism. 

For several reasons this situation takes place more 
often in abnormal persons than in normal ones. 
Every injury to the nervous system involves an im- 
pairment of structure and an impairment of the 
normal reactions of the substratum and of the process 
of equalization. The result is that the sick organism 
is not able to react adequately even to normal stim- 
uli, which become "inadequate." Catastrophic reac- 
tions consequently take place even during normal 
tasks, and catastrophic situations appear very easily. 
Furthermore, they endanger the existence of the ab- 
normal person more than that of a normal one be- 
cause his performances are so limited by his illness 
that he is more likely to be unable to realize essential 
capacities. 

It may be difficult to understand how failure in 
such apparently unimportant tasks as, for example, 
simple arithmetic, can bring an individual into a state 
that actually endangers his existence. In order to 
understand it, one must bear in mind that any failure 
or lack of ability, which to a normal person would 
be merely somewhat disagreeable, may produce in 
the abnormal one a sense of such inadequacy that it 
blocks his ability to perform at all. The danger to 
his existence does not depend upon a special task but 
on the fact that the task places him in the situation 
of not being able to react in accordance with his es- 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 91 

sential capacities. With that, realization of the essen- 
tial capacities is endangered that is, life, existence 
itself. 

As we have said before, the phenomenon of anxiety 
belongs to the catastrophic condition. That is, anxi- 
ety corresponds on the subjective side to a condition 
in which the organism's existence is in danger. Anxi- 
ety is the subjective experience of that danger to 
existence. The catastrophic condition and the phe- 
nomenon of anxiety, in short, have a special signifi- 
cance for life. We feel that we are correct in assuming 
that both of them are to be found in all living crea- 
tures, in animals as well as in man that they belong 
to life itself. 

There is one point which must be stressed. We 
have explained that our patients are not aware of 
the causes of the catastrophic conditions they ex- 
perience. Thus we may conclude that, subjectively, 
anxiety is not connected causally with the experience 
of an event in the external world. Objectively, it is 
true, the condition is connected with such an event. 
The organism, shaken by the catastrophic shock, 
stands in relation to a definite objective reality, and 
the basic phenomenon of anxiety, the occurrence of 
disordered behavior, is understandable only in terms 
of this relation. The subject, however, is not aware 
of this objective reality; he experiences only the 
shock, only anxiety. His anxiety is the result of the 
disordered functioning of his organism, not a reac- 
tion to an object. And what holds true for the pa- 



92 HUMAN NATURE 

tient's anxiety holds true for anxiety in general. Our 
observations of many patients confirm the interpre- 
tation offered by most philosophers and psycholo- 
gists who have dealt with anxiety, that it represents 
an emotional state which does not refer to anything 
definite, that the source of anxiety is nothing and 
nowhere. Anxiety deals with nothingness. It is the 
inner experience of being faced with nothingness. 

This statement is correct only if one distinguishes 
strictly between anxiety and another emotional state 
which is very often confused with it fear. Super- 
ficially, fear may have many of the characteristics 
of anxiety, but intrinsically it is different. The stu- 
dent of human nature has every reason to distinguish 
sharply between these two phenomena. They are not 
characteristic of man in the same way. Anxiety, as 
we have said, belongs to the life of all organisms; 
fear, however, seems to be confined to the "higher" 
organisms, perhaps only to man, because, as we shall 
see, it presupposes the abstract attitude. 

Let us call attention to some phenomenological 
differences between anxiety and fear. 5 In the state of 
fear we have an object before us that we can meet, 
that we can attempt to remove, or from which we can 
flee. We are conscious of ourselves as well as of the 
object; we can deliberate as to how we shall behave 
toward it, and we can look at the cause of the fear, 
which actually lies before us. Anxiety, on the other 
hand, gets at us from the back, so to speak. The only 
thing we can do is to attempt to flee from it, but 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 93 

without knowing what direction to take, because we 
experience it as coming from no particular place. 
This flight is sometimes successful, merely by chance, 
but usually it fails and anxiety remains with us. The 
assumption that we are dealing with qualitative dif- 
ferences is supported by the fact that we have two 
different words, "fear" and "anxiety," and that these 
words are not interchangeable. In German the dis- 
tinction between them is more definite than in Eng- 
lish; it is reflected in such expressions as "Ich fiirchte 
etwas" and "Ich angstige mich" We shall use jcar 
as corresponding to the German word Furcht and 
anxiety as corresponding to Angst. 

We have said that anxiety corresponds to the ex- 
perience of danger to existence. What is character- 
istic of the object of fear? Is it something inherent 
in the object itself, at all times? Of course not. An 
object that at one time arouses only interest, or is 
met with indifference, at another time may evoke the 
greatest fear. In other words, what results in fear 
must be something which is found only in a specific 
relationship between organism and object. What is it, 
then, that leads to fear? Nothing but the experience 
of the possibility of the onset of anxiety. What we 
fear is the impending anxiety. Thus it becomes clear 
that anxiety cannot be derived from the phenome- 
non of fear, and that only the opposite procedure is 
logical. The person who is afraid knows anxiety 
from past experience as well as through imagination 
and anticipation. The person in a state of anxiety, 



94 HUMAN NATURE 

however, cannot know fear, because in the state of 
anxiety he is incapable of any recollection of the 
past. 

Because the person in a state of fear is not yet in 
a state of anxiety, but only envisions it, because he 
only fears that anxiety may befall him, he is not so 
disturbed in his judgment of the outer world as the 
person in a state of anxiety. On the contrary, driven 
by the tendency to get rid of the fear, he attempts to 
establish special contact with the outer world. He 
tries to recognize the situation as clearly as possible, 
and to react to it in an appropriate manner, in order 
to free himself, either by attack or flight, from the 
impending anxiety-situation. Fear is conditioned by, 
and directed against, very definite aspects of the 
environment. These have to be recognized and, if 
possible, removed. Fear sharpens the senses, whereas 
anxiety renders them unusable; fear drives to action, 
anxiety paralyzes. We can escape anxiety only by 
avoiding situations which might result in anxiety. 

From these explanations it is obvious that to feel 
anxiety it is not necessary to be able to give oneself 
an account of one's acts; to feel fear, however, pre- 
supposes that capacity. The observation of our pa- 
tients teaches us that they are very much affected 
by anxiety but not by fear. This corresponds to the 
fact that their attitude toward the abstract is im- 
paired and that they are therefore unable to look 
into the future. Thus it is understandable that fear 
should be a phenomenon especially characteristic of 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 95 

the normal adult human being. Infants, in whom the 
abstract attitude is still in the process of develop- 
ment, are much more harassed by anxiety than by 
fear. 

Now how does the abnormal person get rid of his 
catastrophic reaction and, with it, of anxiety? 

We have stressed the fact that catastrophic situ- 
ations are especially dangerous for the sick man. 
The tendency to avoid them therefore is a dominant 
feature of his whole behavior. Avoiding catastrophic 
situations is possible only if he is able to come to 
terms with the world in spite of his defects that 
is, only if he finds a new milieu which is appro- 
priate to his defective condition, a milieu from which 
no stimuli arise which put him into a catastrophic 
condition. As I have said before, sooner or later 
after the injury to the brain, catastrophic reactions 
become rarer, and the patient grows quiet, happier, 
and more friendly. 

I have had an opportunity to observe this change 
of behavior in great detail in many patients, since 
during and after the war of 1914 I was in charge of 
a large hospital for soldiers with brain injuries. 
These injured men remained for many years and 
lived under conditions that in a way were well 
adapted to the mental changes that had occurred in 
them. Two or three lived together in a room which 
they had to keep very tidy. Each had his own things, 
his own wardrobe, and so on. During the time the 
men were in the hospital they collected many articles 



96 HUMAN NATURE 

which they stored in their wardrobes. The life of 
these patients was ordered in general by household 
regulations. Mealtimes were definitely fixed, as were 
times for walking, resting during the day, going to 
bed at night, and so on. The patients had an oppor- 
tunity to go to concerts, motion pictures, and theaters, 
and to have visitors, and there were many other 
forms of recreation. Within this general framework 
of regulation, however, they still had many opportu- 
nities to arrange their lives in a strictly individual 
manner. 

Now how did the patient, under these conditions, 
avoid catastrophic situations and find a milieu ade- 
quate to his defect? One way to escape catastrophe 
consists in voluntarily withdrawing, to a greater or 
less degree, from the world. In extreme cases the 
only way out is through loss of consciousness, a factor 
which plays an important role in the disturbance of 
consciousness appearing in epileptics. One of my 
patients, living in an adequate milieu, as in the hos- 
pital, was usually quiet and well-behaved. This state 
lasted as long as he had to do only those tasks to 
which he was equal. When faced with a task to 
which he was not equal, he began to tremble vio- 
lently, showed signs of catastrophic behavior, and 
often fell into unconsciousness for a short time. In 
his case a catastrophic reaction of the severest type, 
leading to unconsciousness, could be produced experi- 
mentally. If, after the patient had returned to his 
normal condition, he was asked what had been the 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 97 

matter with him and what had been demanded of 
him, he could give no information whatever. 

Resorting to unconsciousness is, of course, hardly 
a suitable means of avoiding catastrophic situations, 
since it totally abolishes contact between the patient 
and his environment. The organism, therefore, com- 
monly seeks protection in another way namely, by 
avoiding particularly dangerous situations and by 
seeking other situations which promise a minimum 
of irritating stimuli. In discussing this avoidance of 
situations, we must bear in mind that the mentally 
sick cannot achieve such a thing by conscious effort; 
our patients, as we have seen, were unable to recog- 
nize whether or not a situation was dangerous for 
them, because they were impaired in the capacity 
which makes this judgment possible. Avoidance takes 
place in a rather passive way. If the patient has had 
some experience of being disturbed in a catastrophic 
way in certain situations, and if he is able to recog- 
nize these situations by certain particulars, then, 
warned by such criteria, he may withdraw from the 
dangerous approach. In such cases he does not rec- 
ognize the real cause of the danger but is influenced 
by some warning signal. We often observe that 
patients persistently resist certain tasks which, to us, 
seem entirely harmless. We can understand the be- 
havior of the patient in these cases only when we 
see the situation from the point of view of the danger 
it presents to that patient. 

Another method of escaping danger is found in 



98 HUMAN NATURE 

not reacting at all to the required task. If the ex- 
aminer urges the patient, he often gives an answer 
which is not correct but by which he can escape the 
situation for example, "I don't know' 7 ; "That 
does not interest me"; "I don't like it." Usually the 
patient gives these answers very quickly, with a much 
quicker reaction than in other situations. One gets 
the impression that he has a great desire to hurry 
out of a dangerous situation. His countenance shows 
a mixture of anxiety and embarrassment, though he 
may be smiling and seem full of determination. 
Through these expressions he covers his uncertainty, 
hiding it from the examiner and probably from him- 
self as well. You will understand the condition of the 
patient if you imagine yourself taking part in an 
important examination. You are unable to answer 
an important question ; you feel the same embarrass- 
ment, the same desire to cover up the situation by 
evasion and excuses, by giving an answer or doing 
anything which you know is right in itself, although 
it does not fit this particular instance, for in so doing 
you hope to draw the examiner away from the point 
at issue. In such a situation you need not be any 
more conscious of what you are doing than the pa- 
tient. Both of you act as if driven by the desire to 
get away from a dangerous situation, and you use 
the same means of doing so. 

It is natural that the patient should seek protec- 
tion by avoiding company and situations out of which 
troublesome demands may arise. But this does not 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 99 

mean that he is not in contact with his environment 
and that he is doing nothing. On the contrary, he is 
always busy at something not by accident but be- 
cause this activity protects him from disturbances 
which may arise. He avoids a catastrophic situation 
indirectly by busying himself with those things which 
he is able to do. No stimulus is so dangerous for him 
as an unexpected one, because the quick readjust- 
ment which the reaction demands is very difficult for 
him, and may even be impossible. We observe again 
and again that patients start violently when suddenly 
addressed. It is not necessary that what is said be 
irritating in itself. What acts as the irritant is the 
mere fact that the stimulus comes from a situation 
not belonging to the patient's immediate milieu and 
therefore demands a particular adjustment which he 
cannot make. Very often he does not react at all to 
such stimuli, and this has been explained as inatten- 
tion. If spoken to with greater vehemence, however, 
he will respond. By keeping busy he is aided in his 
desire to avoid these sudden irritations. The activi- 
ties which engross him need not be of great value in 
themselves; their usefulness consists in their pro- 
tective character. We call them "substitute reac- 
tions." Just what performances appear as substitute 
reactions depends on the individuality of the patient 
and upon the particular conditions of the environ- 
ment. Wherever we find such performances we have 
to remember that the patient is in a condition in 
which he is afraid of catastrophic situations. The 



100 HUMAN NATURE 

value of these substitute reactions is not primary but 
secondary. 

These phenomena have received much attention 
in neurotics, but it must be noted that organic cases 
behave in the same way. These phenomena in both 
cases have the same character and the same origin 
functionally, differing only in their etiology. When 
produced organically, the defect in special perform- 
ances that results in the danger of entering a cata- 
strophic situation comes from the organic defect oi 
the patient and his inability to fulfill the demands of 
his environment ; in the neurotic it is due to the fact 
that he is incapable of mastering the battle in his 
own soul. 

This flight from demands with which they cannot 
cope makes it plain that our patients are incapable 
of the contemplative attitude of normal persons, that 
they cannot take themselves for granted and play the 
role of detached spectators. For the same reason our 
patients will not walk merely for the sake of walking, 
without a definite goal. They may be able to find a 
known path easily, but they go for a walk only if 
they have a special purpose for example, if they 
are going somewhere in particular or want to fetch 
something. They do not stroll about, for strolling 
about contains in it many dangers of abrupt stimu- 
lation. Thus the patient avoids it, and may even 
resist going to a known goal by an unfamiliar route, 
even if accompanied by a friend. He tries at all costs 
to avoid the unknown. 



ANXIETY AND FEAR IOI 

Another protection from catastrophic situations is 
excessive and fanatical orderliness. Suppose, in sit- 
ting and talking with a patient, you put several 
objects at random on a table. If he becomes aware 
of them, he will at once arrange them in some order. 
Or, to take another example, a patient has just writ- 
ten something for me on a sheet of paper. The ex- 
amination is concluded. "That is all," I say, make 
a quick note, and drop the pencil on the sheet of 
paper, which happens to be lying aslant. The patient 
takes up the pencil, straightens the paper carefully 
so as to bring its sides parallel with the side of the 
table, and then as carefully places the pencil parallel 
to the margin of the paper. I change the pencil to an 
oblique position, and the patient once more puts it 
back into the parallel position. This game can be 
kept up for some time. If the patient is made to 
desist, being told that the pencil is to be left in the 
oblique position, he will obey, but with visible signs 
of discomfort. Apparently such a state of "disorder" 
is unbearable to him. Similar tendencies can be 
observed in regard to time, in behaving in accordance 
with instructions and in response to household regu- 
lations, in thinking, and in behavior in general. The 
patients fulfill required tasks meticulously, and be- 
come unhappy, even excited, if they are interrupted 
by anyone in their work before it is finished. They 
are punctual in their daily activities, in bathing, 
going to bed, etc., doing everything at the prescribed 
time. I have already said that the patients under my 



102 HUMAN NATURE 

observation were supposed to look after their per- 
sonal belongings. Nothing was more illuminating to 
me than the wardrobes and closets of these people 
and the extreme care with which innumerable odds 
and ends, the accumulation of ten years 7 residence, 
were always arranged. Everything had its appointed 
place; and not only that it had to occupy that 
place in a definite way. Looking more closely, one 
discovered a utilitarian motive behind this formal 
geometry namely, that of bringing each article 
within the patient's reach with a minimum of effort 
on his part. 

It may prove interesting to stop a moment here and 
consider what is meant by the words "order" and 
"disorder. " It is impossible to characterize a dis- 
tribution of objects once and for all as either orderly 
or disorderly. Total disorder would be a completely 
haphazard distribution, as far as such an arrange- 
ment is possible. Further, what may appear to one 
person as order may be disorder for another, depend- 
ing on the attitude of each and the capacity of each 
to change his attitude. The adequate distribution of 
certain objects may be one thing for the contem- 
plative individual and quite another for a person 
whose approach is behavioral. A person with a be- 
havioral approach would find a distribution orderly 
which enabled him to use the objects as easily and as 
quickly as possible in the situation in which he was 
acting. Furthermore, the distribution might vary 
greatly with different tasks. A distribution which is 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 103 

adequate for a simple action may be inadequate for 
a complex one and may even hinder the person who 
has to use the same objects in different combinations 
and in different situations. The distribution of the 
objects on the desk of a very busy man may seem 
disorderly if you have no insight into the purposes for 
which they are to be used. When you have this in- 
sight, you see that it may be the best order it is pos- 
sible to find in the situation. It is not uncommon for 
housewives or maids to feel an irresistible desire to 
put such objects in "good" order, to the dismay of 
the man to whom the desk belongs. \ 

For a person who is capable of rising objects only 
for very simple actions that arrangement will be best 
which makes it possible for him to grasp each thing 
easily when he needs it. That means an arrangement 
of objects one beside the other in a place where each 
can be taken hold of quickly. This arrangement is 
"order" for such a person, all other arrangements 
"disorder." 

This primitive type of order is adequate for the 
man with a severe brain injury, since it makes it 
possible for him to perform such simple actions as 
he is capable of. Any change puts him into a state 
of the greatest excitement. For example, one day the 
patients of my hospital had to be moved from one 
ward to another. One of our patients had intended to 
go to his relatives for some weeks during this time, 
a thing he very much liked to do. But when he 
learned that moving would take place while he was 



104 HUMAN NATURE 

away, he refrained from making the visit. He did 
not wish to abandon his possessions not that he 
thought anyone would steal them; he was simply 
afraid that they would be disarranged and left in a 
condition that would make it difficult for him to find 
them. In any other arrangement he would have to 
decide which object to use in a given situation, and 
that was particularly difficult for him, at times even 
impossible. The anxiety that arises out of a situ- 
ation in which he is unable to function leads to his 
holding with great pertinacity to a simple, primitive 
arrangement. It is adequate for him, however, and 
enables him to get along in an undisturbed fashion. 
The sense of order in the patient is thus an expression 
of some pathology, an expression of the impairment 
of an essential faculty of human beings, the faculty 
of meaningfully changing their behavior. 

Not all our patients are orderly to the degree we 
have described, however. Sometimes we find patients 
who exhibit the contrary behavior. This is particu- 
larly the case when they are in an acute condition of 
change, in excitation, in depression, and so on. But 
in these states of disease they are very often shocked 
by catastrophic situations. In chronic disease, where 
there is a quieter general condition, we find this 
abnormal orderliness as a concomitant factors 

One may observe in the behavior of these patients 
another phenomenon, which one might describe as 
abhorrence of a vacuum, a horror vacui. If the 
patient is faced objectively either with a vacuum in 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 105 

space or with a situation which contains no possi- 
bility for him of reaction, he immediately becomes 
troubled, anxious. For example, a patient is asked 
to write a letter, or just his name, on an empty sheet 
of paper. We observe that he hesitates and seems 
embarrassed. He does not know where he ought to 
write, and so he writes at the very top of the paper, 
very often parallel to the top edge. Asked to write 
something more, to write to dictation, he joins the 
new words closely to the first ones written. If you 
try to induce him to write in the middle of the sheet, 
he begins to object and becomes excited. Very often 
it is impossible to get him to write there. But he will 
do so instantly if you draw a line upon which he can 
write. At first it may seem that the patient is unable 
to write without a line, but further examination shows 
that this is not the cause of his deficiency; if it were, 
he would not have been able to write without a line 
at the top of the sheet. No, the deficiency does not 
consist in an incapacity for writing without lines but 
in the inability to do anything without clinging to a 
given concrete object. This inability induces the 
patient to write near the top edge of the paper or 
and this is very amazing if he is not allowed to do 
that, to draw a line at another place on the sheet 
parallel to the edge and to write below that, always 
looking at it as he writes. Even more striking is an- 
other example: a patient was unable to read letters 
or words if they were not written on a line. If you 
wrote a letter on the blackboard without a line, he 



106 HUMAN NATURE 

took the chalk, drew a line under it, and immediately 
could read it. 

There is no question but that our patients try to 
avoid the situation of emptiness. But we cannot as- 
sume that they behave so because of having the 
experience of emptiness. For having that experience 
certainly demands what we have called an abstract 
attitude, in which our patients, as we know, are lack- 
ing. This abhorrence of a vacuum is caused by the 
fact that empty space is not an adequate stimulus. 
The patient cannot handle it, and from this inca- 
pacity arises the catastrophic situation. Faced with 
this condition, the patient recognizes that he is un- 
able t6 act and tries to evade the difficulty by cling- 
ing to an object which he can cope with. 

Now we must discuss further a very interesting 
and important means by which our patients are pro- 
tected against catastrophic situations, namely, the 
means by which dangerous stimuli arising from the 
defect itself, and from the impending realization of 
the defect by the patient, are excluded. 

It is an amazing but very characteristic fact that 
people with brain diseases are very often totally un- 
conscious of their deviation from the normal, of the 
difference between their own state prior to the de- 
velopment of the disease and after it. Their unaware- 
ness is strikingly displayed when they speak to the 
physician of their troubles. It is astonishing how very 
small a part is played in their complaints by the 
paralysis of a leg or the hemianopic defect, by dis- 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 107 

turbances of speech, of recognition, of manipulation, 
etc. This becomes exceedingly impressive when the 
existing defect tends toward a totality, such as com- 
plete blindness, complete loss of speech. It is impor- 
tant to notice, however, that what happens here is 
not simply that the patient is subjectively unaware 
of his defects but that objectively he has so compen- 
sated in his attitude and actions that they cause very 
little difficulty in the field which they concern. 
The analysis of this process of adjustment leads us 
to stress the fact that the adjustment is made in pro- 
portion to the severity of the defect. When the latter 
completely blocks any essential activity, the read- 
justment becomes much better than in cases of lesser 
disturbances. When, for example, sight is entirely 
gone, the patient compensates far more thoroughly 
than when his vision is merely impaired. 

I once had a patient who had been shot through 
the optic nerve (chiasma opticum) and was at first 
totally blind. As long as this lasted he was not con- 
scious of being blind. He used to talk of visual things 
like any seeing person; he was quiet, his behavior 
was orderly, and one could see that he managed to 
get along with the help of his other senses and that 
he adjusted without difficulty in the hospital environ- 
ment. Later his injury improved and to a certain 
degree he regained his sight. Then he became upset; 
he sought to orient himself by means of sight but, 
owing to its imperfection, succeeded badly. He was 
thus less well adapted to his world than when he had 



108 HUMAN NATURE 

been blind. Now, for the first time, he spoke of some- 
thing's not being right with his vision, and this previ- 
ously quite reasonably contented man dropped into a 
state of depression. "What's to become of me if I 
can't see?" he would cry. 

From this and similar experiences we may con- 
clude that alterations are shut out from the life of 
the organism when they would seriously impair any 
of its essential functions. If total blindness remained 
permanently present to the patient's consciousness 
and his situation were the impossible one of facing 
visual demands which he could never meet, then the 
only possible procedure would be the catastrophic 
reaction. But the organism so threatened spontane- 
ously reaches a new equilibrium through readjust- 
ment to the non-visual world. 

We observe all these ways of escaping catastrophic 
situations not only in cases of major brain defects 
but also in severe bodily disease. Most people have 
heard about the characteristic euphoria in patients 
in the last stage of tuberculosis. (I might recall here 
the masterly description of this condition in Thomas 
Mann's novel, The Magic Mountain.) In this we 
meet with a very general biological phenomenon: 
what seems to be a kindness on the part of nature 
saves the organism from an experience too poignant 
to be borne. 

Using what we have learned by studying patients 
with brain defects, we are ready to discuss the role 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 109 

which anxiety and fear play in normal human life. 
In normal life, unquestionably, incongruities often 
arise between the capacities of the organism and the 
tasks imposed by constellations of stimuli in the en- 
vironment; for example, an organism may have to 
cope continually with new tasks i.e., with tasks 
which contain factors not in keeping with the con- 
dition of the organism. The conquest of the world 
inevitably forces the organism over and over into 
such situations. Consequently we assume that the 
"coming to terms" with the world must proceed by 
way of constantly recurring catastrophic situations, 
with concomitant emotions of the character of anxi- 
ety. This is actually the case. To be sure, anxiety 
in its full strength does not always appear when one 
is incapable of solving a problem. It occurs only 
when the situation is of a particular kind. In patients 
with brain injuries it is induced by the fact that the 
impossibility of solving any given problem acts very 
easily as a menace to the existence of the individual. 
In normal persons such a situation i.e., not being 
able to solve a given problem usually does not 
really put the individual into such danger. The nor- 
mal person has many possibilities for managing the 
situation without threat to his existence. And here 
the abstract attitude plays a very great role. Thus 
real anxiety does not always appear, but the structure 
of the emotion is of the same kind, though slighter 
in degree. This emotional reaction may increase to 
real anxiety in a moment, however, if an event in 



HO HUMAN NATURE 

itself apparently unimportant takes place in a situa- 
tion in which it can become dangerous. For example, 
in an examination that is very important real anxiety 
may appear very quickly. 

As might be expected, the appearance of anxiety 
is to be observed especially in the child, who is 
definitely not yet adapted to his environment. 
Staring, the expression of astonishment, a condition 
surely closely related to anxiety, is characteristic 
of the child. But the urge for activity is so great 
in the child that he does not shrink back from the 
danger of anxiety situations; indeed, he even seeks 
them. There is a German tale for children, about 
how Little John went out into the world to learn 
to shudder, which tells how a little boy is driven by 
the desire to learn to know the dreads and dangers 
of the world. The story brings home very well the 
characteristic behavior of children. Again and again 
we see that children not only do not avoid dangers 
but actually seek them out as something to be coped 
with. In place of an anxious astonishment there de- 
velops surprise touched with satisfaction at having 
mastered a bit of the world. Thus anxiety is 
overcome by activity in the sense of a fruitful coming 
to terms with the world, not, as in our patients, 
by the avoidance of reality and the building up of 
a world which is a shelter from the dangers of 
reality. 

As the child becomes adapted to the world of the 
adult, its behavior becomes more even and ordered; 



ANXIETY AND FEAR in 

its personality becomes more balanced and settled; 
its "wondering" decreases. Yet this wondering never 
disappears completely, and the adult, too, again and 
again is shaken by astonishment and anxiety when- 
ever he finds himself facing new outer and inner 
situations and problems which he cannot solve. Like 
the person with a brain injury, though to a much 
smaller degree, the normal person has the urge to 
diminish his anxiety. As an expression of it, we 
find the tendency toward order, norms, continuity, 
and homogeneity, similar in principle to the tendency 
exhibited by our patients. But, on the other hand, 
the normal person is also driven by his inherent 
desire for new experiences, for the conquest of the 
world, and for an expansion of the sphere of his 
activity in a practical and spiritual sense. His be- 
havior oscillates between these two tendencies, and 
is influenced now by one, now by the other. The 
outcome of the interaction of the two is the develop- 
ment of culture and the products of culture. But one 
can in no way maintain that the ordered world 
which culture represents is the product of anxiety, 
the result of the desire to avoid anxiety. Freud, 
for example, conceives of culture as a sublimation 
of repressed drives. This is a complete misappre- 
hension of the creative trend of human nature, and 
at the same time leaves one question completely 
unanswered: why the cultural world should have 
taken shape in certain patterns, and why just these 
forms should be suited to win security for man. The" 



112 HUMAN NATURE 

matter becomes intelligible only if one regards the 
forms as expressions of the creative power of man, 
and of his tendency to effect a realization of his 
nature. Only when the world is adequate to man's 
nature do we find what we call security. 

This tendency toward actualization is primary, but 
it can achieve its end only through a conflict with 
the opposing forces of the environment. This never 
happens without shock and anxiety. Thus we are 
probably not overstating the facts if we maintain 
that these shocks are essential to human nature 
and if we conclude that life must, of necessity, take 
its course via uncertainty and shock. 

Whenever anxiety, as the mainspring of the ac- 
tivity of an organism, comes into the foreground, 
we find that something is awry in the nature of 
that organism. To put it conversely, an organism 
is normal and healthy when its tendency toward 
self-actualization issues from within, and when it 
overcomes the disturbance arising from its clash 
with the world not by virtue of anxiety but through 
the joy of coming to terms with the world. How 
often this perfect form of actualization occurs, we 
leave open to question. In any event, even life in its 
most nearly perfect manifestation must go through 
the disturbances which emerge from the adjustment 
to the environment. The creative person, who 
ventures into many situations which expose him to 
shock, gets into these anxiety situations more often 
and more readily than the average person. The 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 113 

more original a human being is, the deeper his anxiety 
is, said Soren Kierkegaard. According to this phi- 
losopher, the cause of not being able to come to 
terms with the world, the cause of anxiety, is the 
inability to come to terms with the phenomenon 
of sin. The more original a human being is, the 
more he experiences this inability and with it, 
anxiety. 

Individuals differ as to how much anxiety they 
can bear. For a patient with a brain injury, the 
amount is very low; for a child it is greater; and 
for the creative individual it is still greater. The 
capacity for bearing anxiety is the manifestation of 
genuine courage, in which ultimately one is con- 
cerned not with the things of the world but with a 
threat to existence. In the final analysis courage is 
nothing but an affirmative answer to the shocks of 
existence, to the shocks which it is necessary to bear 
for the sake of realizing one f s own nature. This 
form of overcoming anxiety requires the ability to 
view a single experience within a larger context, i.e., 
to assume the "attitude toward the possible," to 
maintain freedom of decision regarding different 
possibilities. This attitude is peculiar to man, and 
it is because persons with brain injuries have lost 
it, and have suffered a consequent impairment of 
freedom, that they are so completely helpless 
when facing an anxiety situation. They surrender 
entirely to the anxiety situation, unless they are 
safeguarded against it through a limitation of their 



114 HUMAN NATURE 

world which reduces their existence to the simplest 
forms. 

The manner in which creatures in general, and 
human beings in particular, cope with anxiety pro- 
vides insight into their nature. Nothing shows 
more clearly the connection between freedom and 
the capacity for sustaining anxiety, and makes it so 
evident that freedom is inherent in human nature, 
than the difference between the behavior of a person 
with a brain injury and a normal personality. The 
more the normal person is able to bear of pain and 
grief pain and grief from which no human being 
is safe, as I believe, because of the phenomenon of 
individualization the more surely he preserves 
his freedom. 

When normal people are beset to an abnormal 
degree by anxiety, they are unable to actualize 
themselves, and the result is catastrophic situations, 
with their consequences. Abnormal states of anxiety 
grow out of various causes, but fundamentally they 
result from the fact that the individual is in a 
state of uncertainty about his existence, taking this 
term in its broadest meaning. This uncertainty may 
be based upon external or internal difficulties ; it may 
rest upon events in the personal life of the individual 
or upon the condition of a group, a class, a people, 
a nation, and so on. 

Uncertainty and anxiety force the individual into 
abnormal activities (i.e., substitute phenomena) or 
into neurosis or suicide. Substitute phenomena 
reveal their abnormal character, their origin in the 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 115 

abnormal isolation produced by anxiety, by their 
abnormal stress on partial aspects of human action 
or nature, and by their compulsiveness, their lack 
of freedom and relationship to reality, to life. Their 
true nature is sometimes misunderstood because 
they may have a high value in themselves, as, for 
example, when they consist in religious beliefs, in 
valuable scientific ideas, in sacrificing oneself for 
political reasons. However, as long as these activities 
are not spontaneous, are not outlets for the free per- 
sonality, but are merely the sequelae of anxiety, they 
have only a pseudo value for the personality. They 
always mean a shrinkage of the freedom of one's 
world. This can be well illustrated by the difference 
between the sincere faith of the really religious man, 
which is based upon willing devotion to the infinite, 
and superstitious beliefs. Or by the difference 
between the open-minded scholar who bases his 
belief upon facts and is always ready to change his 
conceptions when faced with new facts, and the 
dogmatic scientist, who maintains his ideas in an 
obstinate way and supports them by far-fetched 
auxiliary hypotheses because he fears the crash of 
his artificially maintained structure a type to be 
found in any period. There is a saying attributed 
to the Chinese philosopher Chuang-tse which shows 
that four hundred years before Christ there was 
no difference in this respect. Chuang-tse said: With 
a learned person it is impossible to discuss the 
problems of life; he is bound by his system. 

If the shrinkage of personal life reaches too high 



Ii6 HUMAN NATURE 

a degree and nature does not help the individual by 
blinding him to the danger to existence which this 
state involves, then courage reaches its limit. The 
person involved may then fall into insanity, as very 
often happened in the horrible situations of the 
first World War. Or he may become conscious of 
the conflict within him and turn to suicide as the 
only means of protecting himself from the perpetual 
fear of catastrophic situations and the terrible 
experience of not being able to carry out tasks which 
appear to him as the essence of life. A deliberate 
decision to commit suicide presupposes that the 
individual gives an account of the situation to himself 
and willingly chooses death as the ultimate solu- 
tion. Suicide, therefore, is a phenomenon we ob- 
serve only in man. No animal commits suicide. 
Neither do patients with brain injuries, except in 
states of transition in which they are aware of their 
situation. With them, suicide at least, the kind of 
suicide we have in mind is a very rare phe- 
nomenon, and the same is the case with animals. 
An animal which is in great anxiety or a patient 
who is in the same situation or who is suffering to an 
extreme degree may react to this situation in such 
a way that he hurts himself and dies, as a man 
running amok runs into death. Here, however, we 
are not dealing with an action of the will but with 
a sequence of disorder and confusion belonging to 
the catastrophic situation, in which the actions of the 
individual inadvertently cause death. Death then is 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 117 

a mere accident; it is not desired by the individual 
and should not be called suicide. Suicide is a 
voluntary act, and, with that, a phenomenon be- 
longing to abstract behavior and thus characteristic 
of human nature alone. 

When anxiety besets groups or nations, it may 
force individuals into very strange situations and 
lead them to renounce reason and freedom to a 
degree that seems unbelievable to the objective 
observer. This is especially the case in the political 
field. Shaken on the one hand by uneasiness about 
the present situation and by anxiety for their 
existence, deceived on the other by the mockery of 
a brilliant future as the political demagogue depicts 
it, a people may give up freedom and accept 
subordination or virtual slavery. And it may do this 
in the hope of getting rid of anxiety. This is the 
condition which tyrants of any kind utilize for sub- 
duing free people, for transforming them from people 
into masses. The characteristic difference between 
free people and masses consists in the fact that the 
former determine themselves in liberty, bear pain 
and distress, but do this, conscious of necessity, with 
a free will, with courage. Thus, in spite of all 
necessary restrictions, they remain individuals, 
human beings. The man in the masses is not free 
and does not think about what he is doing; yet he 
may be happy in not needing to think. He does not 
need courage; he finds protection against his anxiety 
in the will of other individuals. He behaves like a 



n8 HUMAN NATURE 

man with an .injured brain; he lacks the highest 
capacity of human nature, the attitude toward the 
abstract, losing himself in activities determined by 
concrete demands. Therefore he lacks true com- 
munity with his fellow men, for true community 
presupposes freedom in action and freedom to 
renounce one's right as an individual for the sake 
of one's fellow men. Masses are made up of passive 
beings, driven together by equal needs and equal 
anxiety. And as the attitude of one of our patients 
can easily be modified by a skillful person who knows 
his needs and his fears, so the attitude of the man in 
the masses can be changed, and he can be induced 
to fight even against people who shortly before had 
been his closest friends. The more firmly their com- 
munity is based on the freedom of the individual 
that is, the more truly democratic it is the more 
individual men will resist such influences. 

The differences between individuals in a true 
community and those in masses governed by a 
dictator of any kind lead back ultimately to 
differences in the capacity for taking the abstract 
attitude. There is no better means, therefore, of 
enslaving people and destroying democracy than to 
weaken this capacity. And there is no better means 
of attaining that goal than to create in people a 
state of anxiety. One of the basic pillars of all kinds 
of fascism, consequently, is anxiety. 

Subjugation to a tyrannical government is then the 
last refuge from suicide. Instead of physical death, 



ANXIETY AND FEAR 119 

the individual chooses a more or less conscious 
form of suicide with respect to the essence of human 
nature. How near it is to real suicide can be learned 
from the fact that in such political situations 
physical suicide is a very frequent event in the 
camp of the political party in power as well as in 
that of its opponents. The individual is always in a 
state of conflict between physical suicide and the 
renunciation of what is to him the essence of human 
nature. States of anxiety in groups have the 
characteristics we have described in individuals, and 
many phenomena of social life revolutions and 
wars, especially the latter are understandable 
only in these terms. 

From what we have said, it is plain that we can 
understand the behavior of an organism, and so also 
of a human being, only if we take into account the 
mechanisms used to avoid catastrophic situations. 
In pathological cases the tendency to avoid catas- 
trophies is very prominent; yet even here the 
individual is not governed by this tendency alone, 
for he tries to make use of his capacities. This is 
even more strongly the case in normal people. An 
understanding of normal behavior, consequently, 
asks especially for knowledge of the capacities that 
are characteristic of a particular individual. 



V 
COMING TO TERMS WITH THE WORLD 

Now WHAT are the means of determining the 
capacities of the individual? Observation under the 
atomistic method reveals a great variety of phe- 
nomena. Among them we can distinguish phenomena 
that are directly observable and phenomena that 
can be determined only indirectly, through the 
communication of the individual's inner experiences. 
Thus we observe motor actions of various kinds, 
habits, various sensory experiences, moods, feelings, 
thoughts, motives, tendencies, needs, desires, drives, 
etc. Aside from these innumerable phenomena 
revealed by analytic examination, the organism, 
especially the human organism, appears to us as a 
unit of which these manifold phenomena are the 
manifestations. But this is a mere pre-scientific im- 
pression. Ours is the task of construing this unity 
on the basis of the phenomena we observe. Such 
an endeavor to construe the whole, however, meets 
at the very outset the skeptical opposition that it is 
not necessary to assume such a unit to explain the 
behavior of an organism, that the observable phe- 
nomena are to be understood without reference 
to a personality unit. Personality, according to this 
theory, is nothing more than a collection of hundreds 



COMING TO TERMS 12 1 

or thousands of independent specific habits which 
may be determined statistically. 1 They originate in 
certain inborn stimulus-response patterns or in the 
functioning of definite anatomic and physiological 
apparatuses. Upon these inborn reactions, acquired 
reactions are built up as conditioned reflexes. 

We cannot speak here of the lack of a real 
anatomical basis for this theory. Such famous 
investigators as Coghill, Herrick, Lashley, Bethe, 
and others, are not at all inclined to admit the 
existence of such anatomical mechanisms. 2 In 
several investigations made many years ago I myself 
tried to demonstrate the untenability of this assump- 
tion. Often the student is not aware of the extremely 
speculative character of the anatomical basis of this 
theory. But here we must confine ourselves to a 
discussion of the theory itself. According to it, the 
reflex is supposed to be a constant reaction to a 
definite stimulus, and the behavior of an organism is 
understandable in terms of such constant responses 
and their combinations. 3 

Now observation of human beings shows that 
under natural conditions such constant reactions are 
very rare, if they occur at all. What we observe 
is a variety of reactions to the same stimulus, as 
well as equal or similar reactions to various stimuli. 
If we want a constant reaction to a stimulus, we must 
isolate both the stimulus and that part of the 
organism where the stimulus acts. If, for example, 
we elicit the knee jerk, the rest of the organism 



122 HUMAN NATURE 

must be held in a definite state. The attention of 
the individual must be artificially diverted from the 
event. Only if that succeeds do we regularly get the 
same effect from stimulation of the tendon of the 
knee. The same is the case with the reflex usually 
considered as the prototype of reflexes: the light 
reflex of the pupil of the eye. A constant reaction 
corresponding quantitatively to the amount of light 
is to be achieved only under fixed conditions. 
Usually the reaction varies throughout, depending 
upon the differences in the mental and bodily 
condition of the entire organism. 

Any change in any part of the organism changes 
every reflex reaction more or less. The reflex is 
apparently dependent not only upon the stimulus 
and upon that part of the organism where the 
reaction takes place but also upon the condition 
of the rest of the organism. A very great number 
of observations shows that relative constancy 
is reached only if the influence of all other stimuli 
except the reflex stimulus is experimentally hindered. 
This is very often overlooked, as is also the fact 
that during the course of a reflex the rest of the 
organism is also changed in a definite way. Only 
to superficial observation does the stimulus of the 
sole seem to evoke flexion of the foot alone (the 
so-called foot reflex) and stimulation by light the 
contraction of the pupils alone. The same thing is 
observable in many other phenomena for example, 
those of muscle tone. And all these phenomena 



COMING TO TERMS 123 

those representing the reflex reaction and those in 
other parts of the organism are not only con- 
comitant but constitute a unit, no part of which can 
be changed without changing the other parts, 
including the reflex reaction. This is very often 
overlooked because part of the organism which is 
considered as unrelated to the reflex reaction is 
artificially held constant. On the basis of observation 
we have to say that constant reactions in one part 
of the organism are phenomena corresponding to an 
artificial maintenance of a constant condition of the 
rest of the organism. They are thus in effect re- 
actions of the whole organism, where by artificial, 
experimental means the reactions in the rest of the 
organism are held in a definite, constant state. 

There do not exist discrete, individual reactions 
of parts, as combinations of which the behavior of 
the organism can be understood. On the contrary, 
only knowledge of the whole organism leads us to 
understand the various reactions we observe in 
isolated parts. The response to a special stimulus 
depends upon the significance of that stimulus for 
the performance required of the whole organism at 
the moment of stimulation and is intelligible only 
from this point of view. 

I should like to demonstrate this by an example. 
The tendon reflex is usually considered as the con- 
traction of a muscle as the result of the stimulation 
of its tendon. Very careful investigations by a 
physiologist, Hoffmann, have shown that the tendon 



124 HUMAN NATURE 

reflexes are not elicited by the stimulation of the 
tendon but by the tension of the muscle which is 
produced by the striking of the tendon. Hoffmann 
therefore called these reflexes "prqprioceptive" re- 
flexes (Eigenrejlexe) , reactions to stimuli arising 
through the processes in the functioning of the 
stimulated apparatus itself. 4 The reflex action takes 
place in the following way. The muscle is stretched 
abnormally by the stroke. This tension is followed 
by a reflexively produced innervation by which the 
muscle is brought back to the average state of tension 
of the muscle. This is the activity of the tendon 
reflex. The reader will remember that to the change 
produced by a stimulus belongs the process of 
equalization by which the state of excitation is 
brought back to the "average" condition which makes 
possible the best performance. Here it makes 
possible the exact innervation of the muscle. The 
correct innervation corresponds to a definite average 
tone of the muscle. 

The average state of tension of the single muscle 
is not determined by the condition of the muscle 
alone but by the situation of the whole organism. 
This might be demonstrated in the following way. 
If you jump down a steep incline in such a way that 
you always touch the ground first with your heel, 
then the muscles located on the anterior part of 
the lower segment of the leg and the quadriceps 
are first passively stretched and then contracted 
reflexively. This very sensible reaction seems to 



COMING TO TERMS 125 

take place without any voluntary innervation and 
to be the consequence of a reflex process. It seems 
to happen without any relation to the organism as 
a whole. But, correct and plausible as such an 
explanation seems to be, it is not really so. This 
is to be seen by the fact that, under other conditions 
of the whole organism, we observe a totally different 
phenomenon during the same kind of abnormal 
tension of these muscles. If, as one walks, let us say, 
through a forest, one's foot sticks fast behind an 
object, say a stone, the muscles we mentioned before 
are stretched. They do not contract, however, in 
response to that tension. On the contrary, they 
extend, and the opposite muscles those of the back 
of the leg contract, for only so can the foot be 
released and a fall be avoided. This reaction, too, 
takes place without our knowledge, without our will 
which means reflexively; yet it is certainly not an 
innervation caused by the abnormal tension alone, 
but one determined rather by the condition of the 
organism as a whole. 

Now if we assume that the change of peripheral 
innervation in this case is determined by the whole 
organism, we have no reason not to assume the same 
in the other case. Thus we obtain the following re- 
sult: The reflexive reaction to a change in the pe- 
riphery is determined by the condition of the whole 
organism. This means that so-called reflexive reac- 
tions are reactions corresponding to the condition of 
the whole organism. 



126 HUMAN NATURE 

We might also react in a voluntary way to the 
peripheral change, i.e., to the overtension. But this 
voluntary reaction would come too late, and the 
organism would be in danger of injury. In such 
situations reflex reactions take place, but, as we have 
seen, they are determined by the condition of the 
entire organism. They represent a special type of 
reaction of the organism as a whole. We may say 
then that so-called reflexive reactions appear dur- 
ing certain states of the organism as a whole, i.e., 
in situations of danger in which the organism can- 
not react quickly enough voluntarily. But what 
is most important is that they are reactions corre- 
sponding to the situation involving the organism as 
a whole. 

Furthermore, closer experimental studies of the 
isolated reactions in human beings which are com- 
monly used in support of the reflex theory reveal 
phenomena which speak directly against its basic 
assumption of the single relationship between 
stimulus and reaction. For example, we observe in 
many different parts of the body that most of these 
isolated reflex reactions can be reversed i.e., the 
reflex reaction does not depend solely upon the 
specific stimulus, but, in addition, what was 
considered in the experiment to be stimulus ap- 
parently can be changed by what was considered, to 
be reaction. That is, there is usually a mutual 
influence of the two factors. Under certain experi- 
mental conditions, for instance, we can produce a 



COMING TO TERMS 127 

change of the position of the limbs by bringing the 
head into a certain position. This relationship is 
considered as the effect of a neck reflex from the 
head upon the limbs (one of the so-called Magnus-de 
Klejns reflexes). But the opposite is also the case. 
Under certain conditions we can influence the 
position of the head by changing the position of the 
limbs. On the basis of the tremendous amount of 
material dealing with reactions in the vegetative 
system, the mutual influence between certain stimuli 
and reactions can be demonstrated in the most 
impressive and convincing way. This is a very 
important fact which speaks against the usual idea 
of the reflex character of behavior. 

Thus, after having reviewed all the facts in this 
field, one reaches the following conclusion: We are 
dealing with a system in which the single phenomena 
mutually influence one another through a circular 
process, which has no beginning and no end. If, 
starting with the observation of reflexes, we try in 
unbiased fashion to understand the behavior of an 
organism, the facts everywhere force such a point 
of view upon us. In this disappointing situation 
the adherents of the reflex theory are forced to 
build up supporting hypotheses by introducing 
factors which integrate the mechanisms of single 
processes and thus account for the total behavior 
of an organism, which is always an ordered be- 
havior. But these regulative and integrative factors 
in themselves for example, the assumed regulative 



128 HUMAN NATURE 

higher nerve centers or a metaphysical entelechy (in 
Aristotle's sense) or a vitalistic principle, as Driesch 5 
would call it are all of an order totally different 
from the reflexes. Thus we face a situation in 
which one has to assume two essentially different 
determining factors in the organism: reflexes and 
higher regulating principles. With such a twofold 
assumption the essential significance of the reflex 
theory its claim to explain behavior entirely on 
the plane of reflexes is abandoned. But it is not 
merely that these adventitiously introduced factors 
differ in principle from the reflexes; implicitly they 
are usually thought of as an expression of the 
function of the whole organism. Consequently, the 
whole organism again comes into the discussion, and 
the very situation arises which the simple reflex 
theory tried to avoid. 

Observations of human beings thus fail to support 
the stimulus-response theory; new experiments and 
recent critical revisions of the experiments on 
animals increase our skepticism regarding it. 

The controversy on this issue has reached a climax 
during the last ten years, and more and more evidence 
has been adduced against the stimulus-response 
theory. Such investigators as John Dewey, R. S. 
Woodworth, Thurstone, Karl Lashley, Gordon W. 
Allport, Kluever, the Gestalt psychologists, Wheeler, 
Kantor, Warren, Carter, Jr., and others, 6 have all in 
various ways taken a critical stand against it. It is 
true that it still counts among its followers a great 



COMING TO TERMS 129 

number of well-known physiologists and psycholo- 
gists. But among these many recognize the increas- 
ing difficulties which have appeared as the result not 
only of theoretical discussion but of the discovery 
of new facts and the making of innumerable new 
observations. Difficulties coming from the realm of 
fact must be taken particularly seriously, for the 
theory became famous chiefly because of its 
supposedly empirical character. More and more 
observations of the action of reflexes in animals 
have been published which appear unexplainable 
on the basis of the simple phenomenon of a constant 
connection between stimulus and reaction ; more and 
more factors have been demonstrated to influence 
the reaction. 

There is no paper which illustrates the situation 
better than the presidential address delivered before 
the American Psychological Association (1937) by 
E. C. Tolman, who without any doubt is one of the 
outstanding experts in this field. 7 Tolman's address 
deals with the simple question: What factors cause 
a rat in a simple T-maze to enter, at a given point 
of choice, one of the two channels? The task which 
the rat has to perform seems very easy. The animal 
can run in a maze of T-form from a point of choice 
to one of the two ends of the transverse channel, 
and is trained to go to one of them. The result the 
dependent variable, the percentage tendency at any 
given state of learning for the group as a whole to 
turn left, the behavior ratio, as Tolman explains 



130 HUMAN NATURE 

definitely does not depend upon the stimulus alone 
but upon many factors. Tt would be impossible to 
enumerate them all. The diagram by which Tolman 
illustrates the relationship between the result (the 
dependent variable) and the determining factors 
(the independent variables) is based on a very com- 
plex formula. It should be mentioned only that, in 
addition to the "operational factors" given in the 
experimental arrangement, a series of groups of fac- 
tors is to be taken into consideration. These are six 
groups of environmental variables and four groups of 
individual-difference variables (heredity, age, previ- 
ous training, and special endocrine, drug, or vitamin 
conditions). Each of these individual-difference 
variables is assumed to be potent to influence each 
of the independent variables (the operational and 
the environmental). Further, there are intervening 
variables, which have to be introduced in different 
ways, according to the different theories by which 
the reaction becomes understandable, and which are 
open to discussion. These intervening variables are, 
for example, according to Hull, "conditionings" of 
the running response to successive aggregates of 
exteroceptive, proprioceptive, and interoceptive 
stimuli. 8 Tolman suggests as intervening variables 
such factors as demand, appetite, differentiation, 
motor skill, hypotheses, and biases, which correspond 
to the various environmental variables. As far as 
most of these factors are concerned, an unequivocal 
result may be deducible from the formula which de- 



COMING TO TERMS 131 

termines the reaction to a stimulus, complex as it is ; 
the effect can be considered as a resultant of the 
effects of all the definable factors. 

Further experiments, however, disclose one other 
implication which is much more detrimental to the 
theory. As Tolman explains, the influence of the 
various factors cannot be considered simply as a 
type of summation effect. The manner of combina- 
tion of the factors does not seem to be that of simple 
addition. Certain factors may increase the effect 
of others under certain conditions, but under other 
circumstances they may decrea^p it. To this 
complexity, which can hardly be perceived in an 
unequivocal way, there finally has to be added a 
factor which Tolman calls Catalyzing behavior." It 
consists in "lookings or runnings back and forth" 
on the part of the animal. Kluever and Gellerman, 
especially, have described it in experiments with 
monkeys, chimpanzees, and children; according to 
Tolman, Muenzinger has observed the same phe- 
nomenon in rats. 9 Tolman goes so far as to suggest 
that "such 'lookings back and forth' might be taken 
as a behavioristic definition of conscious awareness." 
Without being able to explain it in any other way, 
he points to its great importance. And, indeed, he is 
right in doing so. This behavior apparently pertains 
to high mental capacities; it is decreased, for 
example, in rats with brain injuries. We do not know 
how the effect of the various factors may be modified 
by this phenomenon, which seems itself to be in-' 



133 HUMAN NATURE 

fluenced by the other factors in a way not yet 
determinable. 

This mutual influence of the factors has not 
received the special attention it deserves in connec- 
tion with our problem. We discussed its importance 
when we spoke of experiments on human beings, 
and we saw that to take it into consideration makes 
it impossible to stand by the reflex theory at all. It is 
thus not surprising that Tolman should come to a 
widely negative result. He feels the urge to declare 
himself for an anthropomorphic approach to the 
problem. He w^tes: "I in my future work intend 
to go ahead imagining how, // / were a rat, I would 
behave as a result of such and such a demand 
combined with such and such an appetite and such 
and such a degree of differentiation, and so on." I 
mention this conclusion to demonstrate what kind of 
result must eventually be reached even by a man 
who has done such outstanding work in this field 
as Tolman has if he reviews critically the facts dis- 
closed in innumerable experiments on animals. 

Certainly any reaction is understandable only if 
we consider the individual phenomenon in reference 
to the condition of the whole organism. In animal 
psychology, too, such a conception has of late gained 
more ground. I should like to mention especially 
the work of K. S. Lashley and Kantor. A follower 
of Kantor, I. W. Carter, after a very careful analysis 
of all the different types of conceptions advanced for 
understanding the facts, holds that only an or- 



COMING TO TERMS 133 

ganismic or interactional conception, as he calls it, 
can do justice to the facts. 10 Thus he comes to the 
same conclusion as I did from my investigations in 
man: that the stimulus has to be considered from 
the point of view of "its stimulating function or 
value" for the individual, and that the response is an 
expression of the adjustment of the organism as a 
whole to the given situation. The special action by 
which this adjustment is reached is understandable, 
I would add, only in relation to the task which the 
organism faces at the moment, and in terms of the 
law that it is the organism's tendency to fulfill a task 
in such a way that its capacities are realized as fully 
as possible. This tendency represents the drive by 
which the organism is set going, a topic we shall 
have to discuss very soon. 

We come to the conclusion therefore that what we 
usually call reflexes are performances of the organism 
which are understandable only from a knowledge of 
the organism. And thus we are brought back to 
the problem which the stimulus-response theory tried 
to solve. 

Now what about conditioned reflexes? 11 
I need not say that we consider these phenomena 
as artificially produced and therefore cannot assume 
that normal life can be based on them. In saying 
this, however, I do not wish to deny that they may 
have significance in some special situations. We saw 
as we discussed proprioceptive reactions to abnormal 
tensions of single muscles that localized reactions 



134 HUMAN NATURE 

may play an important role in situations of 
emergency and danger. Something similar may be 
the case with conditioned reflexes. We are very much 
interested in this problem, because the possible 
demonstration of such significance on the part of 
conditioned reflexes may teach us something about 
the role which artificial events play in normal life. 

A look at the whole arrangement under which 
conditioned responses are built up and maintained 
shows clearly that the situation corresponds to what 
we have described as the characteristic requirement 
of isolated stimulus-response reactions in general. 
Conditioned responses are observed only when the 
organism as a whole is held in a definite constant 
state. In experiments this complicated situation is 
created and maintained by the experimenter. 

I doubt whether in the natural life of an animal 
there can be such complicated conditions in the 
environmental situation as to build up conditioned 
reflexes, and, further, I doubt whether, if these 
conditions exist, they are constant enough to enable 
the conditioned responses to be maintained and thus 
become important for the life of the animal. Here 
is a problem which we have not enough experience 
to discuss. We can say somewhat more about the 
significance of conditioned responses in human 
children. Here, too, the experimenter, the educator, 
has to bring the infant into a situation which is 
suited for building up conditioned reflexes, and he 
has to maintain this condition for as long as the 



COMING TO TERMS 135 

response is to be maintained. In immature children 
this is achieved by reward and punishment, but later 
the acquired actions can be preserved without these 
measures and by other factors, which are given in 
the characteristic organization of the human being. 
Two factors have to be considered. The first is the 
possibility of transition from a conditioned response 
to a natural, normal, adequate performance. For 
example, the baby must learn to control urination. 
He is not able to understand why, or how to manage 
it. Now a conditioned response may be built up 
by using reward and punishment, but later the habit 
is no longer based on these factors. His behavior 
comes to be determined by will, insight, and the 
purposeful use of his organic capacities i.e., a 
special habit becomes part of the behavior as a 
whole that is characteristic of the grown child. Here 
the conditioned response shows its significance as a 
reaction built up in a state of immaturity as prepa- 
ration for real performances in mature life. If 
this mature status is not achieved because, for 
example, of retardation in the child's general, 
especially his mental, development then the 
proper habit will never be perfectly attained. Con- 
ditioned responses are characteristic drill actions. 
Normal learned performances are not the result of 
drill but of training. 

Both these proceedings aim at performances that 
are as good as possible. Training attempts to achieve 
them by exercising the natural capacities of the 



136 HUMAN NATURE 

individual organism and by bringing them to the level 
of greatest efficiency. The performances in question 
are related to the nature of the organism, and the 
intended effect is the highest possible adequate 
relationship between the individual organism and the 
environment. In drill the performance aimed at is 
not related to the nature of the organism. It is 
achieved by building up a connection between a 
particular stimulus and a reaction by an isolated part 
of the organism. This connection, created by the 
method of conditioning, is intended to become so 
well set that whenever the stimulus is present the 
reaction appears automatically. The building up of 
such drill-reactions is possible only if the rest of 
the organism is in a definite situation which is held 
constant by certain means. In animals this is con- 
trolled by the trainer. Later the animal may be in 
a condition in which the isolation of parts required 
for conditioned responses occurs passively, without 
pain, but supported by reward and punishment. The 
best results are achieved, however, if the trainer uses 
performances which are natural to the animal. Then 
the performance will be executed most accurately 
and may also give the animal some pleasure. The 
best drills one sees in circuses are of this kind. An 
expert in drilling animals must be an expert in 
knowledge of their nature. In any case, the main- 
tenance of the action demands the presence of the 
human being; it can never occur through the efforts 
of the animal itself. 



COMING TO TERMS 137 

In human beings as well, the best learning is 
that which is based on the natural capacities of the 
individual. Nevertheless, the human adult is also 
forced to subject himself in some measure to learning 
by drill. Because of the complex structure of 
civilization, his environment is not consistently 
natural. As a result, men are compelled to build 
up external connections between certain stimuli and 
definite reactions which make it possible for them to 
respond to the sometimes very unnatural demands 
of civilization. 

There is a special capacity of human nature which 
enables human beings to build up such unnatural 
connections and to maintain them; it is the capacity 
for abstraction. A human being is able to separate 
functionally parts of his own organism from the 
rest, subject them to specific isolated stimuli, and 
let the reactions run off by themselves. In this way 
he can drill himself. The only thing he has to do 
is to avoid hindering these reactions. It is insight 
into the necessity for such reactions which leads 
the human being to build them up and to maintain 
them. From this point of view it is obvious why 
conditioned responses can be built up more easily 
and maintained better in human beings than in 
animals. 

Thus we come to the conclusion that conditioned 
responses cannot be considered as basic for under- 
standing human behavior. They represent only 
secondary phenomena; abstract behavior is necessary 



138 HUMAN NATURE 

for building them up and maintaining them. In 
animals they depend upon the experimenter's or 
trainer's capacity for abstraction; in infants on that 
of the educator; and in adult men on their own. This 
interpretation of conditioned reflexes in no way 
conflicts with our conclusions about unconditioned 
reflexes. True, conditioning is an essential factor 
in human behavior which must not be neglected. It 
can be used successfully, however, only if we con- 
sider it within the framework of the organism as 
a whole. 

Our discussion of the stimulus-response theory 
has revealed that it is impossible to understand the 
behavior of organisms in terms of constant reactions 
of isolated apparatuses to external stimuli. We have 
alw r ays been brought back to the organization of the 
individual organism as a whole. We come to the 
same result if we try to understand human behavior 
on the basis of the so-called instincts. 

I am sorry that I have no time here to analyze 
in detail the phenomena which are called instinctive 
behavior. 12 A careful analysis leads to the conclusion 
that these phenomena are of various kinds. Some 
the reactions of infancy, as, for example, the to- 
turning reactions or the first grasping and sucking 
movements are reactions caused through the im- 
maturity of the organism; they represent the 
equalization processes of immature living matter. 
For their understanding the assumption of special 
instincts is not necessary. A second group sitting, 



COMING TO TERMS 139 

walking, speaking, etc. represents performances of 
the same order as any other performance. They 
also are grounded in inborn potentialities and 
developed through experience. They have to be 
distinguished from other performances only by the 
fact that inborn and non-conscious factors play a 
much greater role than in other performances 
than, for example, in the highest form of perform- 
ance, voluntary actions. Although the latter, too, 
are based upon inborn potentialities, they are 
determined to a much higher degree by experience 
and learning. In a voluntary action the "drive" 
works through the medium of intention, thinking, 
decision, and motivation on the part of the in- 
dividual; in an instinctive action the performance 
is set going directly by the "drive." Both types of 
performance are dependent, however, upon the 
activity of the organism as a whole. The third and 
last group of instinctive actions is made up of habits 
and customs, actions which are distinguished from 
other performances by the fact that they occur in 
relative isolation from the organism and thus seem 
to represent a special type. They are actions ac- 
quired by the activity of the whole organ which 
later gain a great independence of it. 

In common with the voluntary actions, all these 
so-called "instinctive" actions represent the or- 
ganism's means for coming to terms with the outer 
world in an adequate way; they make possible the 
organism's actualization of its capacities. They" 



140 HUMAN NATURE 

differ from voluntary actions, however, in the va- 
riety of capacities which are actualized under various 
conditions. 

The tendency to actualize itself is the motive 
which sets the organism going; it is the drive by 
which the organism is moved. This idea about drives 
is in contradiction to most theories of drives, which 
assume (i) that the goal of the drive is to release 
itself, to release the tension which corresponds to 
it, and (2) that a number of different drives exists. 
In my opinion both assumptions are wrong. What 
can we learn from the observation of patients 
with brain injuries in connection with a theory of 
drives? 

First, that the tendency to release tension is a 
characteristic phenomenon of pathological life. In 
pathology abnormal tensions occur relatively often 
in single fields, because reactions tend to take place 
in isolated parts and because the process of equali- 
zation is disturbed. Through abnormal tensions with 
which the organism cannot cope, catastrophic situa- 
tions are favored. The sick person has the tendency 
to avoid catastrophic reactions, and therefore has a 
special tendency to remove abnormal tensions. This 
gives the impression that he is governed by a drive 
to do this. For example, the sick who suffer from a 
tension in the sex sphere seem to be forced to release 
this tension. From this observation the idea has 
arisen that it is the real goal of all drives to lift and 
discharge tension, and to bring the organism into a 



COMING TO TERMS 141 

state of non-tension i.e., that it is the goal of the 
drive to release itself. 

The tendency to discharge any tension whatsoever 
is a characteristic expression of a defective organism, 
of disease. It is the only means the sick organism 
has to actualize itself, even if in an imperfect way. 
But the entire existence of a sick organism depends 
upon other organisms. Clearly, life under such con- 
ditions is not normal, and the mere discharge of 
tensions cannot therefore be characteristic of normal 
life. Innumerable instances teach us that it is the 
basic tendency of the sick organism to utilize what 
capacities it has in the best possible way (considered, 
of course, in relation to the normal nature of the 
organism concerned). The behavior of patients with 
brain injuries, for example, is to be understood only 
from such a point of view. A comparison of the 
behavior of our patients with that of normal persons 
leaves us no doubt that the life of the normal 
organism is also governed by this rule. We may say 
then, that an organism is governed by the tendency 
to actualize its individual capacities as fully as 
possible. This tendency is frequently regarded as 
a tendency to maintain the existent state, to preserve 
oneself. We learn from pathology, however, that the 
tendency to self-preservation is characteristic of sick 
people and is a sign of anomalous life, of decay oi 
life. For the sick person the only form of actuali- 
zation of his capacities which remains is the 
maintenance of the existent state. This is not the 



142 HUMAN NATURE 

tendency of the normal person. Sometimes, it is 
true, the normal organism also tends primarily to 
avoid catastrophes and to maintain a state which 
makes this possible, but this occurs only when 
conditions are unfavorable and is not at all the 
usual behavior. Under adequate conditions the 
tendency of normal life is toward activity and 
progress. 

Since the tendency to actualize itself as fully 
as possible is the basic drive, the only drive by 
which the sick organism is moved, and since the 
life of the normal organism is determined in the 
same way, it is clear that the goal of the drive is 
not a discharge of tension, and that we have to 
assume only one drive, the drive of self -actualization. 
Under various conditions various actions come into 
the foreground; and since they seem thereby to be 
directed toward different goals, they give the im- 
pression of existing independently of each other. In 
reality, however, these various actions occur in 
accordance with the various capacities which belong 
to the nature of the organism, and in accordance 
with those instrumental processes which are the 
necessary prerequisites of the self-actualization of 
the organism. 

The concept of different separate drives 13 is based 
on observations of the sick, of young children, and 
of animals under experimental conditions that is, 
on observations made under circumstances in which 
some activities of the organism are isolated from the 



COMING TO TERMS 143 

whole. This is the case in pathology; it is the 
case in children because the organism of the child 
lacks a center; and it is the case in experiments 
with animals because of the experimental conditions. 
One of the basic errors of the Freudian theory 
is that the tendencies observable in sick people are 
considered as the basic drives of the normal human 
being. 

The impression that there are separate drives 
arises easily because the organism is governed at 
one time by one tendency, at another time by 
another, because one or the other tendency in a given 
condition becomes more important for self-actuali- 
zation. This is especially the case when the organism 
is living under inadequate conditions. If a human 
being is forced to live in a state of hunger for a 
long time, or if there are conditions in his body 
which produce a strong feeling of hunger, so that 
he is urged to relieve this feeling, it disturbs the 
actualization of his whole personality. Then it 
appears as if he were under a hunger drive. The 
same may be the case with sex. A normal organism, 
however, is able to repress the hunger feeling or 
the sex urge if it has something very important to 
do, the neglect of which would bring the whole 
organism into danger. 

The behavior of a normal individual is to be 
understood only if considered from the point of 
view that those performances are always fulfilled 
which are most important for the organism. This 



144 HUMAN NATURE 

presupposes a normal centering of the organism 
and a normal, adequate environment. Because these 
conditions are not always fulfilled, even in normal 
life, the organism may often appear to be governed 
transitorily by a special tendency. In this case we 
have to deal with an emergency situation, not with a 
normal one, and as a result one gets the impression 
of a special, isolated drive. This is to be found 
particularly if the organism is not allowed to ac- 
tualize one potentiality or another for an abnormally 
long time, as, for example, if the reception of food 
is hindered for a long time. Then the harmonious 
relationship between the organism and the outer 
world is thrown out of gear, and the individual is 
driven to fulfill that particular potentiality because 
only in this way can its existence be guaranteed. 
We are confronted here with a behavior corre- 
sponding to that in which only the activities prevail 
that are important for mere existence in situations 
of danger. But these are not the activities by which 
normal behavior can be understood. 

On the basis of our discussion I believe we are 
in no way forced to assume the existence of special 
drives. I believe that the facts which are taken as 
foundations for the assumption of different drives 
are more or less abstractions from the natural be- 
havior of the organism. They are special reactions 
in special situations, and represent the various forms 
by which the organism as a whole expresses itself. 

The traditional view assumes various drives which 



COMING TO TERMS 145 

come into the foreground under certain conditions. 
We assume only one drive, the drive of self-actuali- 
zation, but are compelled to concede that under 
certain conditions the tendency to actualize one 
potentiality is so strong that the organism is 
governed by it. Superficially, therefore, our theory 
may not appear to be much in conflict with the 
others, but I think there is an essential difference. 
From our standpoint we can understand the latter 
phenomenon as an abnormal deviation from normal 
behavior under definite conditions, but the theory 
of separate drives can never comprehend normal 
behavior without positing another agency which 
makes the decision in the struggle between the single 
drives. This means that any theory of drives has 
to introduce another, a "higher" agency. Here the 
same situation confronts us as in the discussion of 
reflexes, and we must again reject the auxiliary 
hypothesis as unsuitable in solving the problem. 
In the tendency of the organism to actualize itself 
we are faced with only one question. We do not need 
to assume drives. 

We reject the theory of drives from yet another 
point of view. If one of these potentialities,* or one 
which we can abstract from the whole of the or- 
ganism, is taken as a distinct faculty, we fall into 
the errors of faculty psychology. It is isolated, and 
isolation changes the capacity, exaggerates it, just 

* Henceforth the terms "potentiality" and "capacity" will be 
used interchangeably. 



146 HUMAN NATURE 

as it changes every behavioral aspect taken apart 
from the rest of the organism. If we start from the 
phenomena to be observed in such situations of 
isolation, we can never understand behavior. False 
concepts arise, as of the determining importance of 
single drives, sex or power, etc. A judgment about 
such phenomena as sex and power is to be made 
only if one considers them outside of their ap- 
pearance in isolation and looks at their appearance 
in the natural life of the organism, where they 
present themselves as embedded in the activities of 
the organism as a whole. With this approach to 
the problem, the way usually obstructed by some 
preconceived idea of isolated drives is free for 
new investigations. This should be the essential 
outcome of our critique. 

What are usually called drives are tendencies 
corresponding to the capacities and the nature of 
the organism, and to the environment in which the 
organism is living at a given time. It is better to 
speak of "needs." The organism has definite po- 
tentialities, and because it has them it has the need 
to actualize or realize them. The fulfillment of these 
needs represents the self-actualization of the or- 
ganism. Driven by such needs, we experience our- 
selves as active personalities and are not passively 
impelled by drives that are felt to conflict with the 
personality. 

A special form of such self-actualization is the 
need to complete incomplete actions, a tendency 



COMING TO TERMS 147 

which explains many of the activities of the child. 
In the innumerable repetitions of children we are 
not dealing with the manifestation of a senseless 
drive for repetition but with the tendency toward 
completion and perfection. The driving force is 
given in the experience of imperfection, be it thirst, 
hunger, or the inability to fulfill any performance 
which seems to be within our capacities; the goal 
is the fulfillment of the task. The nearer we are to 
perfection, the stronger is the need to perform. This 
is valid for children as well as for adults. 

The urge to perfection brings about the building 
up of more or less perfect instruments in any field. 
These in themselves become a further impulse for 
the use of the instrumental mechanisms, because this 
makes possible perfection in other fields. As long as 
the child's walking is imperfect, he tends to walk 
and walk, often with no other goal than walking. 
After he has perfected the walking, he uses it in 
order to reach a special point which attracts his 
attention that is, to complete another perform- 
ance, and so on. 

It has been believed that it is possible to reduce 
drives to these instrumental mechanisms. The 
mechanisms themselves are supposed to have 
originated from conditioned responses built up by 
the organism as a means of adjustment during 
development. A drive, then, is nothing but a neural 
process or a habit corresponding to the neural 
process that releases these mechanisms. There is" 



148 HUMAN NATURE 

no doubt that habits lead to activity. But the 
problem is how these habits originate, and whether, 
for their acquisition, a special activity and tendency 
is not the necessary cause. There are two possi- 
bilities to be considered. Either the mechanisms 
develop with the maturation of inborn neural 
patterns without any active interference on the 
part of the organism, or they are built up by the 
activity of the organism in connection with ex- 
perience. Nobody doubts that the development of 
mechanisms is based upon inborn dispositions corre- 
sponding to the nature of the organism, upon inborn 
capacities which develop with maturation. But the 
question is whether these capacities develop without 
any activity on the part of the organism. I think ex- 
perience teaches us that this is not the case. The 
development of the mechanisms takes place as part 
of the organism's procedure in coming to terms with 
the outer world. Walking and speaking do not de- 
velop without an impulse on the part of the child. 
If this impulse is lacking, the development even of 
these definitely inborn capacities is retarded or 
missing. Thus the development of the mechanisms 
presupposes the drive for self-actualization, notwith- 
standing the "functional autonomy" the mechanisms 
achieve later on. 

From these mechanisms arises a strong impulse 
toward action. They become instrumental in the 
performances of the organism and make the self- 
actualization of the organism easier; therefore there 



COMING TO TERMS 149 

is a strong urge to use them. Thus far we agree with 
R. S. Woodworth, 14 who has emphasized the fact 
that "the means to the end becomes an object of 
interest on its own account." But normally this 
"functional autonomy/ 7 as Allport has called it/ 5 is 
meaningfully integrated with the whole of the 
personality; that is, "means to an end/' "mech- 
anisms/' and "habits" achieve independence only 
in so far as they are not in conflict with the "needs" 
of the whole organism and the life situation. When- 
ever they gain an actual autonomy, then we are 
dealing with a quite different phenomenon, with 
unnatural isolation. This applies also to the habits 
of groups i.e., to customs. In the course of history 
many customs, habits, and symbols in civilization 
and culture have attained a certain emancipation 
from their original contextual intention and govern 
the behavior of the individual without his being 
aware of their original purpose. Notwithstanding 
the unjustified tyranny they may exercise and the 
obstacles they may offer to free development, they 
are still embedded within the purposive setting 
of the situations and social framework in which 
they play a part. If, however, this emancipation 
reaches such a degree in individuals that the 
mechanisms become practically detached from the 
personality, then we have to do with pathological 
conditions, with a consequent defective centering of 
the organism. 



VI 

ON THE MOTIVES ACTUATING 
HUMAN BEHAVIOR 

THE DISCUSSION of reflexes, instincts, and drives 
has established our contention that human behavior 
is intelligible only as viewed in connection with the 
organism as a whole. The particular emphasis which 
we have placed upon the abstract attitude as a 
conscious phenomenon may give the impression that 
we fail to pay tribute to non-conscious events. Now 
it is beyond doubt that human behavior cannot be 
understood on the basis of consciousness alone but 
that it embraces a great number of events of which 
we are not conscious. Usually one speaks of the 
"unconscious" factors by which human behavior is 
determined; I prefer to use the term "non-con- 
scious." I am especially induced to discuss these 
non-conscious phenomena because in no field of 
psychology does so much confusion prevail as here, 
even with regard to the elementary facts. 

The non-conscious events which, with the con- 
scious ones, determine our acting and thinking are of 
various kinds. First, there are bodily processes, 
automatisms (as, for instance, expressive bodily 
patterns, postures), which support and facilitate 
appropriate mental and bodily sets initiated by 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 151 

voluntary activity, and thereby guarantee the 
execution of performances. These processes as such 
can never become conscious ; they can be recognized 
only indirectly by the way of perception, just as 
we perceive objects in the outer world. 

The second group of non-conscious events con- 
sists of inner experiences, commonly described as 
feelings, moods, attitudes, desires, needs, etc. We 
may, for example, have the experience of liking or 
disliking something, of finding something agreeable 
or disagreeable, of feeling harmony or disharmony, 
of being under tension or relaxed. This inner state 
is experienced, but can never become conscious in 
the correct sense of the term. 

A proper appreciation of the facts demands a 
short comment here on the use of the term "con- 
sciousness." Very often it has been understood to 
mean the sum of all the contents of the mind of 
which we are aware, and these are regarded as being 
in a special realm, as if contained in a receptacle. 
We speak of consciousness only when we wish to 
denote behavior in which we are aware of what 
we are experiencing, or, as we might say, when we 
are "having" something consciously. We have a 
clear-cut awareness of a given situation, of our ac- 
tivity, of its purpose and its effect. The world then 
is experienced as apart from us, and we experience 
ourselves as objects equivalent to other objects. The 
states mentioned in the paragraph above, indeed, 
are experienced by the subject, too, but they are not 



152 HUMAN NATURE 

objectified that is, they are not conscious in the 
sense described above. If we try to become aware 
of them in this way, we have to transform them 
into objects, and then their original character of 
attitudes, feelings, etc., is lost, and they are distorted 
into "things. " The mere fact that we can reflect 
upon a subjective state as if we were considering 
an object has led to the belief that these inner states 
can become "conscious," but actually this is 
impossible. 

The third group of non-conscious events consists 
of the after-effects of earlier conscious events, which 
have been forgotten but which influence our present 
thinking and acting, with or without our being aware 
of their influence. These phenomena correspond to 
what we call memory. 

Now, in a person whose behavior is conscious, 
there are always in addition to those phenomena 
which we have called conscious attitudes, bodily 
processes, and after-effects of earlier conscious phe- 
nomena. Or, to speak more correctly, all these 
phenomena conscious and non-conscious to- 
gether, in a definite configuration, characterize 
conscious behavior. The singling out of any one of 
these behavioral aspects is a mere abstraction, be- 
cause each of them represents an artificially isolated 
aspect of the total behavior. Sometimes it may seem 
as if they were separate entities namely, when- 
ever one of these aspects of total behavior is in the 
foreground, as figure, and the others form the 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 153 

background. Which aspect of the unitary behavior 
becomes the figure depends upon the situation, upon 
the kind of adjustment demanded from the organism 
as a whole. That aspect comes into the foreground 
which makes possible the optimal coming to terms of 
the organism with a given condition. 

The normal course of thinking can take place only 
in a certain attitude, in a certain setting, and in a 
certain bodily state. Disturbances in the normal 
state of the attitudes or bodily processes derange the 
conscious actions, thought, will power, and so on. In 
the same way, attitudes and even bodily processes 
may be deranged by any disturbance in the volun- 
tary conscious actions. Finally, disturbances of atti- 
tudes bear consequences for the bodily processes, 
and vice versa. A normal action of the organism 
demands a normal configuration of the activity of 
the organism as a whole, a configuration in which we 
can discriminate only abstractly the three aspects 
mentioned. 

Each activity of the organism leaves an after-effect 
which modifies subsequent reactions, their course 
and intensity; the after-effect is strengthened when 
the organism is touched again by the same stimulus 
situation. Remembering and recalling, however, are 
bound to more specific conditions. Not all that we 
have once experienced affects later reactions or can 
be remembered in the same way. Remembrance to 
some extent presupposes a similarity between the situ- 
ation of the organism at the time of the experience' 



154 HUMAN NATURE 

and a later condition. To put it more precisely: an 
event can be remembered only in that modality in 
which it first appeared. Now remembrance is nor- 
mally bound to the figure; the background normally 
comes out in the after-effect only in conjunction 
with the figure to which it belongs. Thus the aspect 
which was originally the figure can affect behavior 
in a similar situation later. If this aspect is conscious 
in the sense given above, it can become effective later 
only in the form of a conscious phenomenon, influ- 
encing other conscious phenomena. If it is an inner 
experience, it can be effective later only in the form 
of an attitude or a feeling that is, as an emotional 
setting, influencing other settings. Thus a phenome- 
non which is not experienced in a conscious form 
can never subsequently become directly conscious; 
and, conversely, a conscious phenomenon can never 
work directly upon attitudes or feelings. There is 
no direct transition from one aspect to the other, nor 
does a direct effect of one upon the other exist. Only 
by way of the whole, by a detour, so to speak, can 
either influence, arouse, or disturb the other. 

In ordered life, after-effects occur in a way ade- 
quate to the tasks set before the individual. Normal 
behavior is built up from the reactions of the indi- 
vidual at a given moment and from those after- 
effects which favor his coming to terms with the 
outer world in the best possible way. Thus, the nor- 
mal development of knowledge, of feelings, attitudes, 
habits, bodily processes, automatisms, skillful ac- 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 155 

tions, and so on, is the result both of the reactions 
of the moment and of past experience. 

There is an abnormal form of after-effect; how- 
ever, which may disturb or even distort the behavior 
of the whole. Such distortion may be caused in each 
of the three aspects of behavior. For example, 
changes in the normal functioning of certain nervous 
apparatuses because of disease may produce as sec- 
ondary changes abnormal effects in the bodily sphere, 
and this changed bodily background may distort 
feeling and thinking, as the subcortical changes in 
postencephalitis do. Abnormally exaggerated ideas 
or images derange conscious life and with it, sec- 
ondarily, mental attitudes and bodily processes. 
Since conscious phenomena form the background for 
feelings and bodily processes, any derangement of 
conscious activity must also modify these phenomena. 
This is the case in some mental diseases. Finally, 
we know of after-effects which are the result of ab- 
normal feelings, attitudes, etc. On these we must 
dwell in more detail because here we are dealing with 
influences to which the term "unconscious" has been 
especially applied. 

These after-effects stem from situations in which 
the organism is not able to react in an adequate way. 
Phenomena then become isolated and attain an ab- 
normal strength. These isolated phenomena have 
abnormal after-effects. If, in spite of these disturbing 
influences, the organism regains order, they may 
remain essentially in the background. However, in 



156 HUMAN NATURE 

a condition where for other reasons the organism 
comes into a state of disequilibrium that is, under- 
goes defective centering these phenomena enter 
the foreground abnormally. 

Abnormal after-effects always grow out of isola- 
tion. They originate in childhood as sequelae of the 
immaturity of the organism, and in adult life from 
conditions in which the demands made upon the or- 
ganism exceed its capacities. 

The infant responds to any stimulation that is at 
all effective with a reaction of the whole organism; 1 
for example, his whole body turns in response to a 
light-stimulus. As he grows older, there are more 
and more reactions of individual apparatuses; that 
is, more and more figures stand out to which a cor- 
responding functioning of the rest of the organism 
belongs as background. Now he reacts to the light- 
stimulus by a turning movement of the eyes alone, 
the rest of his body not participating overtly in this 
movement. Furthermore, in the earlier stage of de- 
velopment the child's reactions differ from those of 
adults in the fact that they consist predominantly of 
processes in the bodily sphere and of inner experi- 
ences, and not, for the most part, of conscious phe- 
nomena. The "figures" at that time correspond rather 
to what we call feelings, attitudes, needs, etc., than 
to conscious experience. On the other hand, all the 
phenomena found in the child are very intensive, 
have abnormal duration and stronger bonds to ex- 
ternal stimuli, and represent both more primitive 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 157 

reactions and reactions in alternating phases; that is, 
they show the characteristics of phenomena in isola- 
tion. The prevalence of isolated phenomena is caused 
by the fact that the reactions occur in an immature 
organism, where the relationship of individual reac- 
tions to each other and to the organism as a whole is 
not fully developed. The normal configuration of an 
organismic event presupposes the organism's ma- 
turity. The criterion of maturity is a proper center- 
ing; this requires the abstract attitude, by virtue of 
which all mental and behavioral aspects can be prop- 
erly integrated and thus adequately centered in the 
personality as a whole. 

The life of the infant is always precarious. Be- 
cause of his immature state, most of the stimuli 
originating in the world surrounding him do not yet 
"fit" his organism; they demand reactions that be- 
long to a more mature, more fully integrated organ- 
ism. In consequence, the organism of the child is 
very often unable to accomplish the required actions 
in an adequate, ordered way. His tendencies, feel- 
ings, attitudes, come into conflict with what is de- 
manded of him; there is a clash between his tendency 
to self-realization, which corresponds to his immature 
state, and what is forbidden. If, however, the adults 
representing the child's environment take such im- 
maturity into consideration and try to avoid situ- 
ations not commensurate with his degree of maturity, 
then he may gradually adapt himself to their demands 
and prohibitions by behavioral adjustments and atti- 



IS8 HUMAN NATURE 

tildes which arise from development and training, 
especially with the help of his increasing capacity for 
abstraction. What we said in our discussion of con- 
ditioned reflexes about the development of habits may 
be recalled here. The child may acquire adequate 
habits especially when consciousness enables it, 
if necessary, to bear voluntarily even something dis- 
agreeable because they seem appropriate and use- 
ful for the actualization of its personality. 

Thus the normal development of the child proceeds 
by way of adaptation through its maturing and 
training. Such attitudes and urges as are in opposi- 
tion to the development of the whole personality 
disappear and become ineffective because of the de- 
velopment of adequate habits. Consequently we find 
not continuous repression but continuous formation 
of new patterns. As the child matures, new patterns 
of the organism are formed, conforming to the ways 
of the human species in general and to the cultural 
pattern of the particular milieu in which the child 
grows up. Of course one may call this development 
"ego formation," and of course the prohibitions the 
child meets with, like other processes in the environ- 
ment, are co-determining factors. Yet the effects of 
former reactions are not forgotten through repres- 
sion; rather, they cannot be remembered, because 
they are no longer part of the attitudes of later life, 
and therefore cannot become effective. Though it 
may be that some reactions are repressed volun- 
tarily, voluntary repression is certainly not impor- 
tant in childhood: first, because conscious behavior 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 159 

is developed only to a small degree; further, because 
voluntary repression requires a very strong will, and 
even then is usually not very successful. There is 
undoubtedly less voluntary repression in childhood 
than there is of building up of new and adequate 
habits. Their development makes for a passive -dis- 
appearance of the older inadequate reactions and 
leads to their fading away into the background. 

If the child is forced to do things that are too 
difficult for him, however, then catastrophic situa- 
tions and anxiety set in, and he attempts to avoid 
these situations through substitute reactions. He 
tends to resort to those attitudes of which he is capa- 
ble (that is, the more primitive ones), because he 
feels himself protected by these against the endan- 
gering demands; or he builds up new habits which 
allow escape from anxiety. He is not conscious of 
these tendencies and usually develops them in the 
way we have described in patients who lack the 
capacity for abstraction. Because of their isolation 
from the total personality these attitudes have a 
disturbing influence and may hinder the further de- 
velopment of the child. Since they do not belong to 
the subsequent developmental stages they upset 
behavior and are experienced as strange to the in- 
dividual. Like all isolated phenomena, they are 
especially likely to produce an ambivalent state. If 
not overcome by later centering, this ambivalent 
mental set produced by a particular situation in child- 
hood may influence the activity of the adult. 

As long as the individual achieves a certain adapta- 



160 HUMAN NATURE 

tion to life in spite of abnormal habits and ambiv- 
alence that is, comes to terms with the world to 
some degree these peculiarities may be considered 
as disagreeable things which have to be borne. If 
later, however, in adult life, situations arise with 
which the individual is not able to cope and which 
produce phenomena of isolation, weakness of center- 
ing, and ambivalence, then the old disturbing after- 
effects may come to the foreground in an abnormal 
way. If these are not conscious phenomena, the dis- 
tortion is regarded as produced by the invasion of 
the unconscious. When these after-effects have an 
abnormal influence, ambivalence increases more and 
more. The patient may be in permanent danger of 
running into catastrophic situations; anxiety leads 
him to search for new outlets; and gradually a neu- 
rotic condition develops. 

For various reasons the patient is not conscious 
of the origin of the symptoms arising from this con- 
dition: (i) the phenomena which disturb him have 
the character of attitudes, feelings, needs, etc., which, 
as such, have never been "conscious"; (2) those 
attitudes are eliminated which produce anxiety be- 
cause they do not fit his present life-situation and 
personality make-up. This may happen in the adult 
without conscious awareness; in the same way, he 
may repress a conflict of the present because he is not 
able to solve it. 

Now, if we offer him protection against his rising 
anxiety, as during therapy, he reveals his ambiva- 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 161 

lence in various ways by expressive movements, 
affective excitation, outbursts, moods of depression, 
and so on. And, of course, he may also express his 
feelings in words. When free associations are elicited, 
especially, he may utter all that corresponds to his 
present and former state of ambivalence, to wishes, 
feelings, attitudes, thoughts, and ideas that belong 
both to childhood and to the present. It is often not 
easy to distinguish which of the phenomena belong 
to the present, which to the earlier, conflict which 
represent the real conflict of the patient, and which 
are only means that later increase it and lead to its 
outbreak. Usually all the ideas expressed are con- 
sidered as emerging from infancy, as having been 
repressed at that time into the so-called "uncon- 
scious." It is assumed to be the task of the psycho- 
therapist to make conscious the repressed ideas which 
produced conflict in infancy, because to this conflict 
is attributed the chief reason for the development of 
the present conflict and thus for the appearance of 
the symptoms. 

Here arises the fatal mistake of psychoanalysis. 2 
Many of the ideas expressed during free association 
may allude to the feelings, attitudes, and "needs of 
infancy, but they are couched in the language of 
adult experience. There is no reason to conclude 
from the observable facts that these ideas have lived 
in the patient's unconscious since his early childhood. 
The fact that they frequently have contents which 
could never have belonged to a child utterly refutes" 



1 62 HUMAN NATURE 

such a conclusion. That some few of the ideas may 
have had their origin in the thinking of childhood, 
and that this can be disclosed as the cause of abnor- 
mal reactions and of later symptoms, does not conflict 
with our statement. The cases in which this occurs 
are ef a special type. For instance, the adult has 
forgotten the once-conscious conflict; yet some habits 
connected with its overcoming persist, and they dis- 
turb him later in situations where they occupy the 
foreground without his realizing their presence. If in 
such cases the forgotten situations are made con- 
scious and this can be done, because they were 
conscious in infancy then it is relatively easy to 
free the patient from his abnormal habits and from 
the concomitant disturbance of his life. 

This is not so easy in those cases in which the 
basis of the disturbance does not consist of forgotten 
conscious phenomena but of feelings, attitudes, needs, 
which did not fit the life-situation in the early stages 
of development. Such a conflict usually results in 
the development of the severe neurosis. Here the 
inadequacy of the feelings is the disturbing factor, 
and improvement is difficult because feelings which 
have never been conscious cannot be made conscious. 
What psychotherapy can do here is to bring the indi- 
vidual into a situation in which these feelings emerge 
without the patient's having to be afraid of them as 
he was in childhood, because now he experiences 
them under the protection of the therapeutic situ- 
ation. This protection enables him to face his feelings 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 163 

and to see that they belong to the state of infancy 
and have nothing directly to do with his present con- 
dition. He realizes that the disturbances are caused 
by factors which were isolated from his personality 
in the past and which have brought about phenomena 
that are apart from his present personality. He 
overcomes their influence by realizing that they do 
not belong to the present conflict and that they hinder 
him from solving it and this is the prime effect of 
the analysis. If we succeed in making him aware of 
this situation, he is forced to occupy himself with the 
present conflict and is able to solve it by finding a 
new adaptation. 

Getting rid of these influences becomes more diffi- 
cult the more one considers them as effects of definite 
forces which live in a special realm of the unconscious 
and which emerge to disturb the individual, without 
his being able to enter this realm and fight the forces 
there. Such a hypostatization of the after-effects of 
needs and feelings, and particularly the application 
of definite names to them, makes a liberation from 
them highly difficult, if not impossible. Psychoana- 
lytic interpretation, which is full of such hypostati- 
zations, often leads to this result. On the other hand, 
it does not make a definite distinction between the 
phenomena belonging to the present state of the in- 
dividual and those belonging to childhood; conse- 
quently it creates a wrong attitude on the part of the 
individual toward the effects of his earlier life. In 
overemphasizing the events of childhood it fails to 



1 64 HUMAN NATURE 

see that motivation and conflict are always contem- 
porary, or, as Gordon Allport says, that motivation 
always has to be tackled from the condition as pres- 
ent. This faulty overemphasis upon the genetic 
approach to the study of conflicts has even begun 
to a*rest the attention of psychoanalysts themselves. 
For example, Karen Horney writes: "I believe that 
the genetic approach if used onesidedly [and I add, 
as is the case in Freudianism] confuses rather 
than clarifies the issue, because it leads then to a 
neglect of' the actually existing unconscious tenden- 
cies and their functions and interactions with other 
tendencies that are present, such as impulses, fears, 
protective means." 3 The astonishing thing is that 
the author fails to realize that with this statement 
she drifts away from essentials of the theory of 
psychoanalysis and deprives it of its real basis. 

This overestimation of the genetic factor, on the 
one hand, and the misinterpretation of the ideas 
presented in free association as being repressed con- 
scious phenomena, on the other, have had a fateful 
consequence in both a theoretical and a practical 
respect. They have induced the analyst to look re- 
peatedly for explanations of the ideas expressed ( not 
seldom selected in a somewhat uncritical way from 
the free associations of the patient), and as a result 
many theoretical statements of psychoanalysis have 
arisen which lead only to the hopeless struggle of the 
neurotic patient with psychoanalytic terms, a situa- 
tion that suggests the vain labor of Sisyphus. 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 165 

With this critical probing of the concept of the 
unconscious, many other essential points of the 
theory of psychoanalysis become doubtful. Since it 
is not my purpose to scrutinize psychoanalysis here, 
however, I must confine myself to these comments. 
Our problem was the unconscious, and thus we had 
to take issue with the Unconscious in the psycho- 
analytic sense. 

In the light of our discussion non-conscious phe- 
nomena take on a character that is quite different 
from the one psychoanalysis ascribes to them. We 
divorce them from their negative denotation as re- 
pressed conscious phenomena, charged with the 
tendency to reoccupy the forbidden grounds of con- 
sciousness; indeed, we try to acknowledge them as 
events of a positive, unartificial, and observable na- 
ture. Finally we attempt to evaluate their signifi- 
cance for and influence upon behavior, be it normal 
or pathological. With this we avoid the wrong 
hypostatization of functional (i.e., configurational) 
events to separate driving forces, which is so charac- 
teristic of the Freudian theory; we thereby escape 
the wrong theory of drives, as well as the false over- 
estimation of single factors which determine life 
for example, sex. 4 

Let me add to our discussion of the unconscious 
some remarks about the epistemological basis of 
Freud's theory, from which alone his point of view 
becomes really understandable. The underlying pro- 
cedure is akin to the one we met in our discussion of 



1 66 HUMAN NATURE 

the reflex theories. In these theories we encountered 
the erroneous premise that the partitive phenomena 
gained by atomistic methods represent facts from 
which we can gain a direct understanding of the 
behavior of the organism and that we can synthesize 
these elements again to form a concept of the organ- 
ism as a whole. We find the same kind of procedure 
in psychoanalysis, especially in its evaluation of 
findings in the free association experiment, which is 
a typical example of the isolating procedure, since 
the subject is instructed to say the first thing that 
enters his mind, neglecting as much as possible its 
relation to his personality. 

If one considers the materials produced through 
free association as facts, one is in the same position 
as if one considered all individual responses to stim- 
uli as building-stones for the understanding of the 
behavior of an organism, and then one runs into the 
difficulties which arise if one neglects the rules gov- 
erning the procedure of isolation. In psychoanalysis 
the same kind of attempt is made to overcome these 
difficulties as in the reflex theories namely, by 
building up a series of auxiliary hypotheses. It was 
in this way that the theory of drives originated, and 
especially the overvaluation of a sex drive. Misjudg- 
ing the relationship between individual phenomena 
and the organism as a whole, Freud conceived the 
idea of a hierarchy of antagonistic mental elements, 
such as the subconscious, the conscious, the ego, and 
the super ego, and converted certain phenomena 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 167 

which appear in the behavior of the organism into 
factors which govern that behavior. Especially un- 
fortunate were his failure to take into consideration 
the fact that all the phenomena on which his theory 
was based had been observed in people who were not 
in a normal state, and his neglect of the fact that it 
is not permissible to transfer or apply directly to 
normal people an evaluation derived from such phe- 
nomena. 

Here again, in spite of its striking difference from 
the other psychology of the late nineteenth century, 
the Freudian form of thinking reveals its origin in 
the same epistemological background and reflects the 
same methodological errors as any other pure posi- 
tivistic-atomistic approach. I have stressed the 
methodological errors which, in my opinion, underlie 
the theory of psychoanalysis because only by having 
recourse to them can a critique be pertinent and 
fruitful 

Freud's theory of the unconscious has its effect on 
his appreciation of the conscious. As we saw before, 
his theory made him fail to recognize the significance 
of conscious phenomena. Before Freud, psychology 
suffered from an overrating of the conscious, and it 
advocated a conception of consciousness in terms of 
a realm with separate contents and with atomistic 
laws regarding their functions. This attitude was 
combined with a neglect of non-conscious phenomena. 
In Freud, however, we find an overrating of the non- 



1 68 HUMAN NATURE 

conscious, which is conceived of as a realm that has 
both content and rules of activity, while conscious 
phenomena are neglected and in their turn consid- 
ered essentially negative. Neither tendency is in 
keeping with the facts. Just as a proper recognition 
of the non-conscious is necessary, so an appreciation 
of consciousness is necessary if we wish to under- 
stand human behavior. A comparison between nor- 
mal persons and those with brain diseases leads one 
to realize the positive importance of consciousness 
and to appreciate the special endowment which con- 
sciousness imparts to man and which distinguishes 
him from all other living nature. No matter how 
many performances patients with brain diseases are 
still capable of accomplishing, they lack every cre- 
ative power, the most characteristic in human nature. 
It is precisely this factual material of pathology that 
impresses us with the enormous significance of con- 
sciousness. 

On the other hand, of course, our standpoint has 
certain implications for therapeutic practice. A criti- 
cal elaboration of psychoanalytic material and theory 
is bound to uncover sooner or later a nucleus of facts 
which will reveal itself as similar in principle to the 
basic types of organismic laws which a more truly 
biological approach discloses. I have mentioned 
many phenomena in our patients which might be 
described in psychoanalytic terms, but they are de- 
scribed more simply and with fewer prepossessions 
in biological terms. The similarity in principle be- 



MOTIVES OF HUMAN BEHAVIOR 169 

tween the behavior of what we call "organic" patients 
and neurotics will become more and more under- 
standable from the point of view that in both cases 
we are dealing with expressions of biological events, 
which are governed by the same fundamental laws. 
If I preferred to make organic pathology my start- 
ing point, I did so because the material it offers is 
easier to study and the conclusions drawn from it are 
less exposed to fallacies than those of psychoanalysis. 
When we shall have reached the phase in which we 
interpret organic and psychogenic cases from a com- 
mon biological standpoint, then many of Freud's 
ideas will be found to retain their importance, and 
his great merit in leading toward a truer understand- 
ing of the nature of man will receive its deserved ap- 
praisal. With all my criticism, I do not wish to give 
the impression that I am blind to the enormous 
merits of Freud. Yet even a genius is a child of his 
time. If I see it correctly, it was Freud's fate not to 
achieve the goal of understanding human behavior 
to its very depths a goal to which he came nearer 
than anyone else because of his preoccupation 
with certain prejudices of the natural science of his 
time. 

Our approach endeavors to open the way for the 
discovery, without theoretical bias, of the essential 
conflicts which ultimately bring about disease. The 
conflict has to be understood on the basis of the indi- 
vidual life-history, which contains bodily processes, 
attitudes, and conscious events. All these events have 



170 HUMAN NATURE 

to be considered in their configurational relation 
within the given individual according to the situation 
in which they originally took place, and they have to 
be evaluated according to their present significance 
for the individual's coming to terms with his environ- 
ment. When this approach is adopted, psychotherapy 
will lose much of its exciting, interesting character, 
but I think it can be brought nearer to simple truth 
and, because the duration of treatment will be 
lessened can be made more beneficial to the patient. 



VII 
ON THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 

OUR ANALYSIS has disclosed some characteristic 
trends in the structure of the organism. We have 
seen the specific significance of the abstract attitude 
for human behavior, the relation between abstract 
and concrete behavior, and the role both play in 
human life. We have familiarized ourselves with the 
character of conscious and non-conscious events and 
the way they influence each other. We have become 
acquainted with some of the general rules that deter- 
mine the human being's coming to terms with the 
outer world. We have learned that man is a being 
who does not merely strive for self-preservation but 
is impelled to manifest spontaneity and creativeness, 
that man has the capacity of separating himself from 
the world and of experiencing the world as a separate 
entity in time and space. All these features we have 
inferred from the changes which patients with brain 
injuries show as a result of the loss of various capaci- 
ties. 

In attempting to understand human behavior, 
however, we cannot content ourselves with these 
results so long as we are unable to determine the 
qualitative structure of the individual human organ- 
ism in which reactions in a given situation are ulti- 



172 HUMAN NATURE 

mately rooted. It will be remembered that in all our 
discussions we had to refer back to the potentialities 
of the organism as basic for all its activities. We 
arrived at the conclusion that the drive which sets 
the organism going is nothing but the forces which 
ari^e from its tendency to actualize itself as fully as 
possible in terms of its potentialities. But what are 
the potentialities of a given individual? 

In making definite general statements about hu- 
man potentialities we must be mindful of the fact 
that any such general statements are abstractions 
from what has been observed in individuals, and 
that we have learned nothing about how to investi- 
gate these potentialities. Unquestionably, we have 
to go back to concrete findings as offered by the 
isolating methods. But how, among the innumerable 
observable phenomena, shall we discriminate be- 
tween those which really correspond to the nature 
of the individual and those which are only more or 
less accidental reactions produced by the method 
that has been used? To decide this question we are 
in need of a criterion. We are faced here with a 
problem which lies at the center of modern psychol- 
ogy, the problem of how to characterize personality. 

Although for a time the study of personality was 
neglected to a marked degree by psychology, scholars 
are now at work in many places trying to find a way 
to comprehend it. I cannot describe these various 
attempts here, but those who wish to become thor- 
oughly acquainted with the complexity of this prob- 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 173 

lem and the multiplicity of the attempts to attack it 
will find Gordon W. Allport's Personality: A Psy- 
chological Interpretation an excellent guide. (In ad- 
dition to giving an admirable critical review of the 
research methods in this field, the book presents a 
conception of Allport's own which is well worth 
following up.) 

We can assume that those factors belong essen- 
tially to an organism which guarantee its existence. 
There is no question that, in spite of its changing in 
time and under varying conditions, an organism 
remains to a certain degree the same. Notwithstand- 
ing all the fluctuations of the behavior of a human 
being in varying situations, and the unfolding and 
decline that occur in the course of his life, the indi- 
vidual organism maintains a relative constancy. If 
this were not the case, the individual would not ex- 
perience himself as himself, nor would the observer 
be able to identify a given organism as such. It 
would not even be possible to talk about a definite 
organism. 

This is not the place to elaborate on the highly 
specialized and subtle controversies that center 
around the question of specificity versus consistency 
of traits, nor to reiterate the difficulties which the 
advocates of specificity have encountered and the 
criticisms which have been presented recently in 
various publications. I prefer to take another route. 
I should like to contribute to the discussion by draw- 
ing evidence in favor of consistency from a kind of 



174 HUMAN NATURE 

material which is not so well known but through 
which biology can supplement psychology. 

Consistency appears in pathology in a special 
form, in the abnormally ordered behavior of the 
patient. It is true that we have to deal here with a 
pathologically exaggerated phenomenon, but, as we 
have explained above, the tendency to ordered be- 
havior belongs to the normal organism as well. Con- 
sequently, in their content observable activities dur- 
ing ordered behavior can be considered as reflecting 
essential capacities belonging to the individual con- 
cerned. 

If we consider an organism first in the usual 
atomistic way, as composed of parts, members, and 
organs, and then in its natural behavior, we find that 
in the latter case many kinds of behavior which on 
the grounds of the first consideration can be con- 
ceived of as possible are not actually realized. In- 
stead, a definite selective range of kinds of behavior 
exists. These we shall classify as "preferred" be- 
havior. To avoid possible misunderstanding it should 
be pointed out that this term does not imply any 
conscious awareness or choice of a special way of 
performing; it is merely descriptive of the observable 
type of behavior. The way in which the organism 
actually experiences this state of preferred behavior 
we shall describe later. 1 

To illustrate the phenomenon we have ample choice 
in the various fields of pathological human behavior, 
normal human behavior, and animal behavior. To 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 175 

mention one example in animal life, we know that a 
cat, when dropped, always lands on its feet. In spite 
of differing environmental situations it always re- 
turns to an optimally balanced position, and this we 
call the preferred position. If we turn the head of a 
cat toward one side we find an immediate compensa- 
tion for this abnormal position, a turning back to the 
old position. Or, if this is prevented, the posture of 
the rest of the body changes until a definite total 
position is again achieved. Thus, within a certain 
range, the animal has the capacity of adapting itself 
to differing environmental situations through spe- 
cific positions of the body. Certain definite positions 
and actions belong to the various activities of the 
animal sitting, eating, sleeping, etc. The number 
of possible positions and performances becomes much 
larger in the higher animals, and especially in man. 
But even in human beings the possible positions and 
other modes of behavior by no means correspond in 
number to the organization of the members con- 
cerned, and to the quantitative variability of the 
environmental situation, as it appears in the usual 
analytical investigation. 

The phenomena to which I wish to point first can 
be easily observed. Anyone can make the pertinent 
observations. If a person points to a place that lies 
more or less to the side, he does not always execute 
the pointing movement of the arm in the same man- 
ner. If the object at which he is pointing is slightly 
to the side, say to the right, he points only with his 



1 76 HUMAN NATURE 

extended arm, without moving the rest of the body, 
in such a way that the angle between arm and the 
frontal plane of the body is obtuse, about 130 tQ 
140. If the object at which he is pointing lies more 
nearly in front of him, then the arm is no longer 
moved alone, but the trunk too is moved somewhat, 
toward the other side (the left), so that the pointing 
arm still forms approximately the same angle with the 
frontal plane of the body as before. If the object 
pointed at lies further to the side say to the ex- 
treme right then the body turns so far to the 
right that, when the subject points, the angle between 
the frontal plane and the arm is again essentially the 
same as before. Of course, it is possible to behave 
differently; for example, one can point forward while 
the body remains fixed. But this is not the natural 
way. In the pointing movement, then, the organism 
seems to have the tendency to prefer a definite rela- 
tion between the positions of arm and trunk, and 
does not conform to the varying environmental de- 
mands, although this could very well be done by 
changing the relation between the arm and trunk 
positions. To take another example, if one asks a 
person who is standing to describe a circle, one type 
of individual usually describes a circle of medium 
size in a frontal plane parallel to the line of the body, 
using the index finger of the right hand, the arm being 
half flexed at the elbow. Larger circles and circles 
in other positions, possibly executed with the ex- 
tended arm, seem unnatural and uncomfortable to 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 177 

such persons, who naively proceed in the manner we 
have described. When the trunk is bent forward, 
however, it is natural for this type to describe the 
circle in a horizontal plane. One might think the 
horizontal circle simply the result of the movement 
of the arm in the same relationship to the upper part 
of the body as before, and due only to the change in 
bodily position. If this were true, we should have a 
circle in an oblique plane; actually, however, it is in 
the horizontal plane. In this position, apparently, 
the circle in the horizontal plane corresponds to the 
preferred behavior. Accurate analysis shows that 
the manner of describing the circle is unequivocally 
determined by the total situation of the subject. In 
"total situation' 7 the factor of the subject's attitude 
toward the task is included; consequently the circle 
is not made by all subjects in the same way. In a 
specific situation, however, each one makes it in a 
specific way which he prefers, quite naively, to all 
other possible ways. 

Through this simple experiment one can detect 
some characteristic properties of individuals belong- 
ing to different types of personality. In the one type 
the objectifying attitude prevails. This type prefers 
to describe a small circle in an almost frontal parallel 
plane. Another type is more subjective and has a 
prevailing motor attitude. This type describes a large 
circle with the extended arm, with excessive move- 
ment in the shoulder joint; actually the subject does 
not describe a true circle, but moves his arm around 



178 HUMAN NATURE 

in a circular fashion, for which an excessive excur- 
sion is most natural. These variations in the execu- 
tion of the circle reveal differences between men and 
women, between persons of different character, voca- 
tions, and so on. But each person has his own pre- 
ferred way of performing, and it is this that is 
essential for the point under discussion. 

If one who is accustomed to hold his head some- 
what obliquely is forced to hold it straight, it requires 
a special effort, and, in addition, after a certain time 
the head will return into the usual, "normal" posi- 
tion, unless the subject prevents this by continuously 
paying attention to the position of his head. If, in 
going to sleep, one assumes a variety of positions, 
one will very soon take a certain position which leads 
naturally to falling asleep. Much wakefulness is due 
simply to the fact that one is prevented by some 
circumstance from assuming this natural position. 
If we trace the causes for the assumption of such 
positions, we find a great variety of bodily and psy- 
chological factors, but they are almost always fixed 
for a given individual. 

In abnormal persons such phenomena can be ob- 
served even better than in normal persons. We have 
stressed the fact that in our patients we are dealing 
with states of disintegration or decreased differentia- 
tion of personality. The reduced and narrowed per- 
sonality of the patient is cut off from many events in 
the outer world which the normal person experi- 
ences; it is confined to a more limited order, as is 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 179 

shown by the tendency to abnormal orderliness as a 
means of avoiding catastrophes. In an organism thus 
reduced to a simpler form of organization and to a 
shrunken range of activities, preferred behavior 
comes strikingly to the foreground and it ought 
therefore to be easier to discover its qualitative 
characteristics. 

There are two further circumstances which bring 
preferred behavior to the foreground in abnormal 
persons. A normal person, because of his capacity 
for abstraction and voluntary action, is able to exe- 
cute tasks in a not-so-preferred condition and to 
maintain a not-preferred behavior. In addition, he 
is not restricted to the type of preferred behavior we 
have been discussing; he is capable also of preferred 
performances on a higher level, which correspond to 
his higher level of performance in general. The ab- 
normal person is either wholly incapable of this, or 
less capable of it, because of his lack of the capacity 
for abstraction. As a consequence, he is subject in a 
higher degree to preferred behavior. This is mani- 
fest in the fact that a patient who is asked to execute 
a movement in an uncomfortable position invariably 
shifts into a more comfortable one unless his atten- 
tion is concentrated entirely on the task demanded 
of him. To prevent such concentration it usually 
suffices to have him carry out the movement with 
closed eyes. We find then that, even against his will, 
and usually without his knowledge, he assumes the 
preferred position. The second circumstance is as 



l8o HUMAN NATURE 

follows. In normal persons preferred performances 
have a certain range of variability within which a 
performance is still adequate. In abnormal persons 
this realm is narrowed and the preferred perform- 
ances are restricted to more rigid positions and to 
mope fixed relations between positions. Thus, for ex- 
ample, in a patient with a disturbance of the left 
frontal lobe, the preferred position of the head is a 
slight tilting to the right. This is his natural position. 
If the examiner brings the head into a straight posi- 
tion or tilts it to the left or even further to the right, 
the head returns without the subject's knowledge 
into the natural position, where it ultimately will 
remain. The same thing happens if the patient him- 
self intentionally holds his head in an abnormal posi- 
tion and then pays no further attention to it. A 
normal person can hold his head in a position that is 
to a certain degree oblique without discomfort and 
without having an irresistible tendency to bring the 
head back to its normal position. The patient is 
forced to bring his head back. 

What we have said about these simple motor ac- 
tions is valid for all other performances. Every indi- 
vidual reveals preferences not only in the motor 
sphere, in walking, standing, sitting, eating, and so 
on, but in the sensory and intellectual processes, in 
the realm of feeling and voluntary activities. The 
perceptual field offers some interesting examples. 
When angles between 30 and 150 are presented 
optically, not all the steps of the differential threshold 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 181 

are experienced as equal. What we recognize pri- 
marily are acute, obtuse, and right angles. (The 
knowledge of these facts we owe especially to the 
investigations of Max Wertheimer 2 and other Gestalt 
psychologists.) These are the preferred impressions 
around which all others are grouped. Each of -the 
preferred impressions has its range. An angle of 93, 
for instance, appears as a poor right angle, deviating 
somehow from the preferred impression, and does not 
give the impression of uniqueness. In tachystoscopic 
experiments it is the circle which is easiest to recog- 
nize; polygonal figures are perceived as circles. The 
circle is also preferred tactually. In the common 
field of vision there is a preference for the square, 
for certain curves, symmetry against asymmetry, the 
vertical against a somewhat oblique line, and so on. 
Corresponding phenomena are found in the field of 
tones. The fourth and the fifth are preferred. Small 
deviations leave perception relatively unaffected. 
Larger deviations are experienced as an impurity of 
the fifth (as a bad fifth, etc.), without one's always 
being able to say in which direction the deviation 
occurs. 

In pathology the assimilation of an oblique line to 
a vertical is particularly instructive. The line pre- 
sented may deviate considerably from the objective 
vertical and still be experienced as a vertical. This 
becomes especially apparent when a patient sees the 
line as a vertical irrespective of whether it deviates 
to the right or to the left. When I showed one of my 



1 82 HUMAN NATURE 

patients a stick one foot long at a distance of two 
yards, first in a vertical position and then in a ten- 
degree inclination to the left or to the right, he did 
not notice the difference, but saw only a vertical rod. 
(Correspondingly, a stick that deviated by ten de- 
grees from the horizontal was always seen as horizon- 
tal. Only in deviations above ten degrees did the 
patient see that the stick was oblique.) When the 
stick was turned from the vertical into the oblique 
position he did not see the change until the stick 
reached the region where he could experience 
deviations. 

The usual explanation of these phenomena even 
in normal persons as being the effects of past experi- 
ence, habit, training, etc., has proved invalid. For 
material on the subject I may refer here to the nu- 
merous experiments in Gestalt psychology and to 
many published observations in pathology. 

Performances under preferred conditions show 
two characteristics, (i) They represent the most 
exact execution of the required task under the cir- 
cumstances given; for example, pointing in the pre- 
ferred realm is much more exact than elsewhere. 
(2) They are executed with a feeling of comfort and 
ease, of fitness and adequacy. Natural performances 
under not-preferred conditions are experienced as 
disagreeable, unsatisfactory, unnatural. 

As I have explained elsewhere,* observation shows 
that preferred performances are determined not only 

* See p. 248, note i to Chapter VII. 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 183 

by the processes in the area where we observe them 
but also by the condition of the rest of the organism. 
On the basis of many facts reported elsewhere I 
reached the conclusion that preferred behavior in 
one field always means preferred behavior on the 
part of the whole organism; the tendency toward 
preferred behavior is an expression of the fact that 
the organism constantly seeks a situation in which it 
can perform at its best and with optimal comfort. 
Preferred performances are the performances which 
correspond best to the capacities of the organism. 
Thus observation of such performances may serve as 
a means of finding out the capacities the constants 
of the organization and functioning of the indi- 
vidual. The problem of research on personality can 
thus be substantiated. We are only at the beginning 
of this kind of quest. Consequently, our discussion 
will have to deal more with possible methods of pro- 
cedure in this new field than with a comprehensive 
survey of facts. 

For our purposes we should have to explore an 
individual by exposing him to a variety of tasks in 
the fields of perception, motor performance, memory, 
thinking, and so on; in every instance we must seek 
to determine what are for him the preferred ways of 
execution. These consist not only of the actual pat- 
terns of the performance as determined from ob- 
served overt behavior but include the preferred 
mediums of execution, as, for instance, retention 
through the medium of visualization or through the" 



1 84 HUMAN NATURE 

medium of kinesthetic representation. For every 
task there is an objective optimal manner of adequate 
execution, and for every individual there is a certain 
range of possible variations within the realm of his 
preferences. Consequently, we may call the pre- 
ferred way of execution a constant of the individual. 
Ultimately these constants are basic traits of the 
constitutional and character make-up of the indi- 
vidual. Wherever the individual does his best, not- 
withstanding the fact that another solution may be 
more adequate in the light of the objective optimal 
execution, we are dealing with a constant. Here we 
face a number of interesting psychological problems 
and educational implications upon which I can only 
touch in passing. Very likely the question of indi- 
vidual aptitudes perhaps even the problem of 
intelligence ought to be oriented by the meas- 
ure to which objective adequacy and the subjec- 
tive preferred way of performing approach each 
other. 

In all these investigations, of course, we have to be 
mindful of certain positive and negative criteria. 

i. No matter what the behavioral field in which 
we may test an individual, we are justified in speaking 
of a constant only when and if other pertinent tests 
show that, concomitantly with the execution hi that 
field, the rest of the organism is in ordered condi- 
tion ; for example, definite behavior in a sensory field 
can be called constant only when we ascertain that, 
among other things, blood pressure, respiration, pulse 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 185 

rate, threshold of reflexes, etc., correspond to the 
norm of the individual, which is to be determined for 
each field in the way just described. 

2. If a required task falls outside the realm of the 
preferred ways that are peculiar to an individual, the 
corresponding capacity is wanting in a greater or less 
degree. In such a case we have to vary the methods 
of examination until the subject is able to cope with 
the task in some way that he finds natural. For 
example, an individual is subjected to a task for the 
execution of which visual memory is a prerequisite 
(e.g., he is asked to memorize a complicated path). 
Now we find that, if we try to impose the use of 
visual imagery, his general state becomes disturbed. 
But if we allow him to choose another means of 
coping with the task for instance, memorizing by 
verbalization instead of visualization then he may 
perform fairly well, and his general condition will 
remain undisturbed. He will verbalize, for example, 
in this way: "First I have to turn left, then go a 
hundred feet straight ahead, then turn to the right," 
and so on. The result is not, of course, so successful 
as it would be through visualization, which is better 
adapted to this particular task, but it is precisely 
because of this that the performance is so revealing 
to us. It indicates the patient's lack of capacity in 
the visual field and brings to light his preference for 
memorizing by language; another person may have 
another preference, drawing upon kinesthetic mem- 
ory, for example. Thus this method may be instru-" 



1 86 HUMAN NATURE 

mental in discovering the constants in individuals in 
certain types of performances. 

3. The preferred and ordered behavioral forms 
(constants) are not identical in all the performances 
of an individual. On the contrary, the individual 
responds to every type of task in a special way. This 
is determined by the organism's tendency to come 
to terms with the requirements of the outer world in 
the best possible condition of the whole. This can be 
attained by various means in various tasks. Conse- 
quently, constants have to be determined through 
the discovery of the types of task which the indi- 
vidual can perform most successfully, as evidenced 
in his preferences. Of course, the circumstances 
under which a task is presented also have an influ- 
ence in that they elicit differing preferred ways. But 
by varying and controlling these circumstances we 
can find out under what conditions an individual 
performs best and which of his preferred ways repre- 
sents a true constant. For example, if a person is 
faced with a task under conditions which prescribe 
different speeds of execution, he may execute this 
task adequately within a certain range of speed but 
fail when other speeds are demanded. Now we can 
define his constant on the basis of the knowledge we 
have gained by introducing controlled circumstantial 
variables. 

The constant in the temporal course of processes 
must be regarded as particularly characteristic of 
individuality. The important role of the specific 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 187 

temporal sequence of processes for the ordered ac- 
tivity of the normal organism can be seen in the fact 
that many pathological phenomena may be regarded 
as being predominantly the expression of changes in 
the normal temporal course. This is shown not only 
by the analysis of symptoms but also by investiga- 
tions with time-measuring methods (e.g., chronaxie 
and electroencephalography). Every human being 
has his own rhythm. This rhythm manifests itself in 
various temporal measures in various performances, 
but in any given performance it is always in the 
same measure. A performance is normal only when 
an individual can accomplish it in the rhythm that is 
natural to him for this performance. This holds true 
for psychological events like emotion or thought 
processes or acts of will; it is also the case in physio- 
logical processes, like the beating of the heart and 
respiration, and in physicochemical processes. All 
these time constants indicate particular characteris- 
tics of the personality. 

From my experience to date I believe that we are 
justified in selecting a number of factors as guiding 
for the determination of constants. We have pointed 
out that each person prefers a definite medium for 
the performance of certain tasks for instance, a 
definite sense modality, or the motor apparatus, or 
speech; all this is indicative of certain constants. The 
preference for a concrete or an abstract approach 
falls under the same aspect. 

But we must be careful not to relapse into the old 



1 88 HUMAN NATURE 

notion of visual, auditory, motor, and other types. 
The preference for a certain sensory medium in one 
field involves certain characteristics of behavior in 
fields other than the preferred one. These character- 
istics are not necessarily the same and may be of 
different natures although they are dependent upon 
preferences in other fields. They are ultimately em- 
bedded and rooted in a definite interactional organi- 
zation of the personality as a whole. And we must 
inquire about the qualitative nature of this inter- 
action. For example, if a person is preinclined to the 
concrete attitude, his behavior is very often accom- 
panied by less emphasis on verbalization and lan- 
guage than is the case in the person preinclined to 
the abstract. In turn, the latter will fail to regard 
many details in his environment which do not elicit 
a language response. Again, the person with a tend- 
ency toward the abstract leans toward personalized 
emotional contacts with others; the person with a 
tendency toward the concrete is more given to ob- 
jective realities in social contacts. I mention these 
examples in order to illustrate two points: (i) that 
preferred ways in one field influence and shape pre- 
ferred ways in other fields; (2) that this influence 
does not occur by direct causation, nor does it mani- 
fest itself by uniform phenotypic symptoms, but 
rather indirectly, by way of the functional organi- 
zation of the whole. The usual test approach fails 
here to consider the peculiar interactional dependence 
of all behavioral fields upon the personality structure 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 189 

as a whole. This complex relation remains to be 
explored and defined before we can draw conclusions 
from results in tests which are based on the erroneous 
premise that any capacity is a factor of uniform 
manifestation in all the activities of an individual. 
Obviously, all this has a bearing upon the mueh- 
discussed problem of types, as, for instance, the 
introvert-extrovert problem. 

It is true that as yet we do not know very much 
about the determinants of the functional relation 
between a preferred performance in one field and 
performances in other fields. Pathology, however, 
has adduced empirical evidence to the effect that 
changes of constants in one field are accompanied 
by changes in other fields, so that we may reasonably 
infer from this material the functional interdepend- 
ence we have suggested above. 

Only on the basis of the knowledge of the struc- 
tural interrelation between preferred performances 
in various fields can the problem of what are called 
types 3 be treated in a reasonable way. In the last 
few decades an immense literature has accumulated 
on the subject, and certainly there are groups of 
individuals who are so similar with respect to some 
traits, and so different from other individuals, that it 
seems very reasonable to consider them as belonging 
together to a special class, as being a type. 

In accordance with differing approaches toward 
the understanding of human behavior, attempts have 
been made to define these groups in various ways. 



1 90 HUMAN NATURE 

Plato's metaphysical division of the human soul into 
three parts we meet again in Bain's classification of 
men as "mentals," "men of action/' and "vitals." 
The theoretical, economic, social, and political types 
of Spranger represent the expression of another still 
mofe philosophical approach. Physical features form 
the basis for the creation of anthropological types 
marked by differences of skull, hair, color, and so on. 
Impressed by differences in temperament or, more 
recently, by differences in the functions of the endo- 
crine glands, some investigators have distinguished 
the melancholic, the choleric, the phlegmatic, and 
the sanguine types. An interest in the constitutional 
habit was the basis for the well-known types of 
Kretschmer which have achieved significance in psy- 
chiatry. From the psychological standpoint, types 
have been discriminated on the basis of the special 
development of single senses (the auditive type, the 
visual type, etc.). Finally there should be men- 
tioned the much-discussed distinction of types ac- 
cording to differences in the individual's general 
attitude to the world, the introverted and extroverted 
types. 

In all these hypotheses there is certainly something 
which we feel to be true. Notwithstanding this, all 
these attempts must be considered failures, even if 
they happen to be useful for some practical purpose. 
The never-ending discussion about the correctness of 
these distinctions shows this only too clearly. The 
cause of the failure seems to me to be grounded in 
the same methodological error as the failure of the 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 191 

reflex theory. Single phenomena are taken as essen- 
tial factors either because of their accidentally com- 
ing into the foreground or because of theoretical 
prejudice. If one considers such single factors as the 
basis of personality, then one easily yields to the 
impression that individuals are merely examples of 
types characterized by these factors. This procedure 
is wrong, however, in its selection of the determining 
factors, and does injustice to the nature of indi- 
viduality. The error in selection could be avoided 
if the factors were determined by the methods we 
used in establishing the preferred behavior of the 
individual. And such a procedure alone w r ould do 
justice to the nature of individuality. Under these 
circumstances individuals would never appear as 
mere examples of types. We could, of course, use the 
concept of types as a means of sorting the immense 
variety of individuals for practical purposes. Then 
it might be useful in several respects. It might 
serve to reveal the significance of some attributes 
within the organization of an individual, to reveal 
the special character which an individual may have 
through the predominance of such an attribute. 
Further, the better knowledge of similarities and 
differences in individuals might help us to under- 
stand why some are fitted to get along with one an- 
other, others not. Finally, the concept of types, 
which has frequently been utilized for stressing dif- 
ferences between groups, might be extremely useful 
in demonstrating factors of similarity. 

In connection with the question of the functional 



192 HUMAN NATURE 

relation between those factors of personality which 
we call preferred, I should like to suggest that factor 
analysis might offer an appropriate method of ap- 
proach. Factor analysis tries to discover the factors 
on the basis of which personality can be understood. 
If Jt were possible to determine with this instrument 
the performances that are preferred (in the sense 
in which we have defined the term), then we might 
hope to discover by objective mathematical methods 
some consistent traits of personality. But this can- 
not be attained through a comparative investigation 
of a great number of subjects by means of standard- 
ized tests. How can we tell whether we grasp the 
essential factors with these tests? Methodologically 
this would be possible only if we could study the 
tested group under conditions which represent an 
ordered state for each individual within the group. 
This presupposes, however, that we are acquainted 
with the nature of each person in that group; and 
so we are brought back to the individual as our point 
of departure. Factor analysis may have value as a 
technique if it is applied fruitfully to the individual 
proper, where the major determinants of preferred 
performances and their structural interrelation within 
the whole personality may become susceptible of 
mathematical representation. 

The methods which till now we have considered 
instrumental for determining the basic constants of 
an individual are more or less confined to a cross- 
sectional aspect of his present behavioral state, but 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 193 

there can be no doubt that we ought to include the 
temporal aspect of his total behavior that is, the 
course of life and the biographical span of the per- 
sonality explored. In other words, the biographical 
method or "anamnesis," as we call it in medicine, is 
an indispensable supplementary source of informa- 
tion. It can furnish a distinction between the factors 
which make for ordered or disordered behavior, be- 
tween genuine constants and the more casual pheno- 
typic reaction patterns, habits, and so on. Only on 
the basis of information regarding the course of the 
individual's life can we really identify unequivocally 
the constants in question, by recognizing their con- 
sistency and persistence in the pattern of that per- 
son's development. 

I am, of course, well aware of a question which 
probably has beset the mind of the reader since I 
began to outline the importance of preferred be- 
havior. In what way are the individual's constants 
influenced and modified by experience, and in what 
way do they in turn shape and mold the experiences 
of the individual? In attempting to answer this 
question, we must first of all recognize the ultimate 
consequence which follows from the conception of 
preferred behavior. If there are any constants aUall, 
then they must operate as selective and accentuating 
factors upon the experiences of the individual and 
the stimuli by which he is affected. 

In order to appreciate this rule we must recall the 
result of our discussion of the problem of drives. It 



194 HUMAN NATURE 

will be remembered that we came to the conclusion 
that the only drive or basic tendency of the organism 
is to actualize itself according to its potentialities in 
the highest possible degree. This is possible only if 
the organism is faced with situations it can cope 
with, From what we have learned about the behavior 
of our patients we know that, if the patient is faced 
with environmental conditions with which his 
changed personality cannot come to terms, then he is 
either not touched at all or he responds with a cata- 
strophic reaction. He can exist that is, actualize 
his capacities only if he finds a new milieu that is 
appropriate to his capacities. Only then can he act 
in an orderly way, and only then can his powers of 
recognition, attention, memory, and learning be at 
their best. 

These facts offer us the key to our question re- 
garding the relation between preferred performances 
and experience in the normal person. The experiences 
a person has, or is able to assimilate or acquire, hinge 
upon his capacities, and these we can infer from his 
preferred ways of behavior. Only if given the oppor- 
tunity to realize himself in these ways will he be in 
an ordered state, which is the basis of good perform- 
ance; in other words, the more the demands made 
upon him correspond to his preferred ways of be- 
having, the more nearly perfect will his achievements 
be. Of course, these preferred ways of behaving 
have a determinable range of variation and should 
not be treated as fixed and rigid patterns. The ex- 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 195 

perienceable environmental segments may vary 
within certain limits according to this range of vari- 
ability. And it is this scale of variability which has 
to be carefully studied and weighed by the investi- 
gator of the mutual interdependence of preferred 
behavior and environmental demands. In orde* to 
determine and secure the best possible performances 
of an individual, and in order to develop his manifold 
potentialities to their full capacity, we have to know 
the extent of this interdependence. In pathology this 
fact is quite obvious. We have acquainted ourselves 
with the rule that patients have catastrophic reac- 
tions, and that their intact performance fields are also 
reduced, if the demands of the outer world exceed 
the scope of their impaired capacities. Such a dimi- 
nution of capacity for performance also takes place 
if the demands are too low, and the capacities which 
remain are not called upon and utilized to their full 
extent. Then a shrinkage of the patient's milieu and 
personality sets in which is greater than the actual 
impairment would entail. 

From this it follows that, if we wish to prompt the 
development of an organism in the way best suited 
to its potentialities, our demands must be neither too 
low nor too high. The measure of the commensurate 
degree is to be found in the organism's range of pre- 
ferred ways of behaving. 

We have tried to qualify the relation between the 
demands of the outer world and the development of 
the capacities of an individual. With this in mind we 



196 HUMAN NATURE 

can also understand the far-reaching influence of a 
given milieu upon the actualization of the individ- 
ual's potentialities. Wherever a person grows up, 
his environment is of a specific nature, and this 
provides the cultural and social contents of his de- 
velopmental socialization; that is, the determination 
of the specific character of the potentialities of any 
individual is oriented by the contents of his milieu. 
This relation between the individual and his environ- 
ment has implications for a number of much-dis- 
cussed problems, such, for instance, as questions 
having to do with learning and education, with racial 
differences, and with differences in the development 
of societies and culture. These problems seem to per- 
tain to quite diverse topics, but in my opinion they 
all go back ultimately to one question namely, 
how can the individual actualize himself in the world 
in the way that best corresponds to his capacities? 
I should like to comment briefly on my views on the 
solution of the problem of differences in character be- 
tween the inhabitants of different countries and states 
and between races. 4 These differences stand out most 
strikingly if, under the influence of a bias, we push 
single properties into the foreground as chief charac- 
teristics and compare the groups or races as to such 
properties. If we do this, we see only the differences 
and are inclined to overrate them in a way that does 
not at all correspond to the facts. This fallacious 
procedure is the mainspring of all personal national 
and racial prejudice and one of the chief causes of 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 197 

much of the suffering and distress in the world. 
Fundamentally this state of affairs is the result of a 
lack or a falsification of knowledge, and of a corrup- 
tion of science, which lends pseudo-scientific argu- 
ments and pretended justification to all kinds of 
abominable actions. 

The importance of enlightenment in this field can- 
not be overstated. It cannot be said often enough 
that individuals, peoples, races, can actualize them- 
selves without harming each other, that this can be 
accomplished only by an adequate organization of 
group life, and that, moreover, the life of any group 
is guaranteed only in an organization which guaran- 
tees the existence of other groups as well. The search 
for innate factors of any kind which can account for 
racial differences has been vain, and it is not surpris- 
ing that this is so. The empirical evidence adduced 
and the painstaking analysis undertaken by Boas, 
Klineberg, and others, have shown that all the varie- 
ties of race and culture which have been attributed 
to inborn, unchangeable factors are as a matter of 
fact culturally and socially determined. Even such 
differences as those in pigmentation and other con- 
stitutional properties do not alter the fact that aft. 
men are endowed with ecmal inherent potentialities.1 
All individual differences granted and, in fact, 
precisely because of the vast variety of existing 
individual differences we know that no race pos- 
sesses traits by which it can be distinguished intrin- 
sically from other races. The fact that there is great 



1 98 HUMAN NATURE 

diversity of traits of personality in all races and 
groups, and that it traverses the boundaries of every 
population and sector of the globe, proves that all 
the phenomena which are common to a group or race 
are not reducible to common inborn personality 
traiffc in that group. 

Our biological point of view, especially our notion 
of preferred behavior, would seem to contradict these 
statements. Therefore I must reemphasize the postu- 
late that the range of variability in the preferred 
ways of human behavior has to be considered as the 
deciding factor in the variety of social and cultural 
patterns. Within the interactional relation of en- 
vironment and organism the members of any group 
will actualize their potentialities according to the 
peculiarities of their environment, adapting them- 
selves to its natural and social demands. The prob- 
lem of differences in society and culture is basically 
similar to the problem of personality, as far as the 
contents of life, conflicts and demands, are concerned. 
Here, too, we cannot draw artificial dividing lines in 
the true unitary pattern of life in which the person 
and his environment are interwoven, and we have 
therefore to reject the doctrines of the extreme 
environmentalist, as well as those of the extreme 
believer in heredity. How the relation between in- 
dividual and society presents itself from our stand- 
point we shall see later. 

On the basis of the relationship we have tried to 
establish between the range of variability in pre- 



THE STRUCTURE OF PERSONALITY 199 

f erred behavior and the diversity of cultural products, 
we come to noteworthy conclusions, (i) Our asser- 
tion that man as a species is endowed with potentiali- 
ties which are basically equal is confirmed by the 
fact that, different from ours as modes of life and 
thought among primitive peoples are, there i^ no 
doubt in the minds of competent anthropologists 
that, if we^transplanOa member of such a group into 
our society, he can be trained to think in our terms; 
this holds particularly, of course, with regard to chil- 
dren. (2) The importance of the relationship be- 
tween capacities and environment for ordered be- 
havior may again be ascertained by the study of 
abnormal persons. In contrast with normal persons, 
they are so rigidly bound to a definite environment 
that they perish if this environmental setting is 
changed in a way not adequate to their preserved 
potentialities. This pathological fact teaches us 
something with regard to the adjustment of the nor- 
mal person to changes of environment. The vari- 
ability of which we have spoken has a certain limit. 
If the changes imposed upon an individual or group 
go beyond the limits of possible adjustmental vari- 
ations, or if, in other words, the demands of the 
outer world exceed the range of adequacy for the 
individual, then catastrophe occurs and the organism 
can no longer function in orderly fashion. I think 
this rule may offer us a key to the understanding of 
certain disorders in individual behavior as well as in 
the functioning of a society. For example, many a 



200 HUMAN NATURE 

disturbance has been found in the development of 
children who are left-handed, and who have been 
forced into right-handedness, in which the disorder 
appears in fields totally different from the sphere of 
left- or right-handedness, so that only a scrutinizing 
analysis can reveal the cause. Later we shall discuss 
certain consequences of this rule for social life. 
(3) There is a third aspect in the relation of pre- 
ferred behavior and environment. It will be recalled 
that when we turned our attention to the problem of 
how experience influences preferred behavior, and 
vice versa, we stressed the fact that the preferred 
tendencies of an individual operate as selective and 
accentuating factors upon his experience. It may 
not seem obvious, but close reflection suggests that 
there is an intimate relation between the preferred 
modes of behavior of the individual and the psycho- 
logical motivations of his conduct, contact with 
others, likes and dislikes, and attitudes toward life. 
Just as we have agreed with Woodworth that 
habits once formed may achieve a motivational im- 
pulse, so we may assume that the drive to actualize 
one's potentialities also operates as a motivating 
force in one's emotional valuations in accordance 
with one's preferred ways of acting. 



VIII 
THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 

WE HAVE elaborated the contention that there is only 
one motive by which human activity is set going: the 
tendency to actualize oneself. This emphasis upon 
the supreme importance of the nature of the in- 
dividual might easily lead to an interpretation of 
our standpoint as an asocial individualism and 
egotism. In fact, however, such an interpretation is 
flatly opposed to the idea of human nature which we 
are attempting to advance. It is directly opposed to 
the fact that individuality never means simply "I 
am" but always that simultaneously with me there 
exist other creatures. 

Our observation of our patients shows that they 
cannot actualize themselves without respect to their 
surroundings in some degree, especially to other 
persons. The sick man is exposed to catastrophic 
reactions to a higher degree than the normal man; 
he can perform only if he finds a milieu which allows 
him to avoid catastrophic reactions. This implies 
that his behavior has to presume definite environ- 
mental conditions, in particular the existence of 
other men. The patient must develop an adjustment 
to others and limit himself according to the social 
actuality of others. 



202 HUMAN NATURE 

True, as we have said before, the patient is 
subject to this connection with others in a somewhat 
passive way. Even on this reduced level, however, 
such a connection indicates that the existence of one 
man presupposes another man. Because of their 
lack of the capacity for abstraction, our patients are 
not capable of creating contacts actively and 
spontaneously. Therefore their existence depends to 
a high degree upon the cooperative activity of their 
fellow men. One can hardly find a better example 
of the fact that the attitude of self-restriction belongs 
to natural human behavior than that given by the 
behavior of normal persons toward the sick, which is 
characterized by active self-restriction in the interest 
of the sick. This fact gains greater significance in 
view of the contrasting behavior of our patients, 
who lack the capacity for voluntary self -restriction. 
It is because of this that they seem so self-centered 
and that they are unable to build up by themselves 
a real community or a social world. What patients 
exhibit of an apparent social character is actually 
something quite different. 

The attitude of self-restriction in the normal 
person has often been considered to be caused by 
the impact of extraneous forces, and understood, 
like other altruistic customs, as a mechanism for 
yielding to insuperable forces in the struggle of life. 
In this sense all social norms are supposed to be 
merely the products of sublimation. We have ex- 
plained, however, that such an interpretation is 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 203 

incompatible with the facts. Self -restricting behavior 
can be understood only if we assume that it is due 
to an underlying tendency which belongs to human 
nature, or that, as John Dewey says, "the ideas 
involved in such behavior appeal to something in 
human nature and awaken in [man] an active 
response." Otherwise there would be only a struggle 
of all against all, a condition out of which social life 
could never originate; the law of the jungle would 
prevail. 

Self-restriction in the interest of another, however, 
is not the only form of behavior which reveals that 
a connection with and dependence upon others is 
part of the nature of man, and even requisite for 
the existence of the individual. There is still another 
behavioral interrelation between individuals which 
is inherent in man. The self-actualization of the 
individual in his social environment can take place 
only by his encroaching upon another's freedom, by 
claiming something from another, by imposing 
upon another to a certain degree. The primary fact 
that the individual does not exist alone, but with 
other creatures, necessarily implies the incomplete 
realization of every individual's nature; it entails 
impact, antagonism, conflict and competition with 
others. 

Self-actualization on the part of one individual 
can be attained only by some renunciation on the 
part of another, and each must ask from others 
that renunciation. Hence there is not a pre- 



204 HUMAN NATURE 

established harmony between human beings. Ac- 
cording to the myth of the expulsion from Paradise, 
man lost that state of permanent mutual accord 
through the sin of cognition. No longer is it possible 
for him to realize himself through a coming to terms, 
without conflict, with his natural and social environ- 
ment. Neither offers him the immediate primeval 
adequacy that Paradise seems to have offered. Man 
can no longer live in effortless harmony with the 
world. He has to seek it in an active way. And he 
is free to make his own decisions. 

One might evaluate this freedom as essentially 
positive or essentially negative; certainly it remains 
a basic characteristic of human nature, as we can 
demonstrate clearly in the changes in our patients. 
Being individual, being free, implies the necessity 
of encroaching upon the freedom of others. The 
two things are the same. Therefore, we may say 
that the activity of encroaching also belongs to 
the nature of man. 

These two kinds of behavior, self-restriction and 
encroachment, have been spoken of (by McDougall, 1 
for example), under the names of "submission'' and 
"aggression," as two basic drives of human nature. 
In terms of our general criticism of the theory of 
drives and instincts we have no reason to assume 
such inherent drives. These two types of behavior 
are not separate and antagonistic tendencies 
operating in the human being. Man is neither 
aggressive nor submissive by nature. He is driven 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 205 

to actualize himself and to come to terms with his 
environment. In doing so, he has at times to be 
submissive and at times to be aggressive, depending 
on the situation. 

Whenever either form of behavior achieves 
dominance in such a way that all the activities of 
the individual seem to be under its control, then 
something has gone wrong in the relationship be- 
tween the individual and the surrounding world. 
Either the individual lacks adequate centering or 
the demands arising from the world are so difficult 
that he is not able to cope with them. Under such 
conditions one or the other of these two types of 
behavior comes abnormally to the foreground, and, 
according to the law of isolation, behavior takes 
on an abnormal character. Then we encounter 
either self-sacrifice or aggressiveness. Abnormal 
aggressiveness or submissiveness we observe es- 
pecially in patients who lack the capacity for 
abstraction and in those in whom there is a patho- 
logical isolation of certain personality sectors. In 
the latter case the individual may be driven by an 
irresistible urge to fulfill the needs say abnormal 
hunger or sexual desire that result from this 
isolation. Then he is inconsiderate, reckless, and 
highly aggressive in seeking the release of this urge. 
This can be observed in patients with organic as 
well as functional diseases. Thus we find aggression 
as a characteristic symptom of neurosis. Abnormal 
aggression is always combined with abnormal sub-" 



206 HUMAN NATURE 

mission, however, and what we observe in our 
patients is an abnormal exaggeration of normal 
behavior. Normally behavior fluctuates in adequate 
proportions between self-restriction and an en- 
croachment upon the freedom of others. The 
exaggeration in pathology is the sequel of a lack 
of proper centering, which, as we have explained, 
always produces opposed reactions that alternate 
abnormally. As in normal persons, the situation 
determines which type of behavior becomes the 
figure, comes to the foreground; the only difference 
is that the intensity is abnormally exaggerated. That 
behavior always appears by which in a given condi- 
tion the organism can best come to terms with the 
outer world; and this rule holds for a changed 
personality as well as a normal one. 

Aggressiveness may come into the foreground if 
an individual is afraid to show his inclination to 
submissiveness, because he fears that people would 
misuse his subjection and that he would meet with 
situations that he could not bear. On the other 
hand, abnormal submission may appear as an 
expression of fear of normal aggression.-' A child 
may have grown up under conditions in which he 
faced the danger of unreasonable punishment for 
any attempt at encroaching upon other people, espe- 
cially his mother and that even if the degree 
of the intrusion was normal for a child of that age. 
One of my patients found that any opposition to 
her mother made her lose her mother's affection, 
and without this she could not live. This led her 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 207 

to suppress all resistance, and eventually she was 
governed by abnormal submission. This experience 
influenced her behavior during her entire future 
life. As an adult, she seemed to be very compliant 
and gave the impression of being an abnormally 
submissive person. In certain situations, however, 
abnormally aggressive behavior suddenly appeared, 
astonishing not only the people around her but also 
the patient herself. As a matter of fact, such a person 
is not abnormally submissive, as it would appear to 
a superficial view, but ambivalent] from this am- 
bivalence emerges abnormal submtesiveness as well 
as abnormal aggressiveness. 

Normal, ordered life asks for a balanced relation 
between compliant and encroaching behavior. Only 
then can the individual realize himself, and assist 
others in their self-realization. Furthermore, the 
highest forms of human relationship, such as love 
and friendship, are dependent on the individual's 
ability and opportunity to realize both these aspects 
of human behavior. This is evident so far as self- 
restriction is concerned. It acquires then the char- 
acter of self-restriction without resentment. But 
encroachment also belongs to every relationship 
between individuals. Love is not merely a mutual 
gratification and compliance; it is a higher form of 
self-actualization, a challenge to develop both one- 
self and another in this respect. This challenge in- 
volves aggression inasmuch as it involves influencing 
perhaps even coercing another to do things 
which sometimes seem foreign to him. Self-restric- 



208 HUMAN NATURE 

tion is experienced as inherent in human nature; it 
corresponds to what we call the ethical, to the norms. 
Our intrusion upon others is often experienced as a 
suffering that has to be endured, as one of the diffi- 
culties of life that must be borne. It is experienced as 
suffering because interference with one's own free- 
dom or that of others has the appearance of injustice. 
But if one understands the necessity of such inter- 
ference for one's own or another's sake, one can 
tolerate or enact it without self-accusation, and with 
less harm to others. Then indeed it should no longer 
be called aggression, since it is not intended to hurt 
anyone. To call it pseudoaggressive attitude would 
be more nearly correct. 

If this conception of the relationship between one 
individual and another fits the facts, if all relations 
between individuals are determined by the tendency 
of each to realize himself, then we may draw the 
general conclusion that the individual is primary in 
all social organization. Very often the "we" that 
is, the relationship between the individual and others 
is considered the primary factor, and the indi- 
vidual's behavior is supposed to be understandable 
only in terms of that "we." 3 Indeed, there is no 
question that in a concrete situation it is often the 
case that the individual is determined to a high 
degree by the community in which he lives. But the 
question is: Is this a normal situation that is, does 
it correspond to the nature of man, or is it merely 
an accidental phenomenon? In other words, is the 
"we" empirically given? Can it serve to make 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 209 

understandable in terms of human nature the self- 
realization of the individual? Is the fact that the 
"we" determines the behavior of the individual 
sufficient to prove that it is normal? There is no 
doubt that its empirical character is not necessarily 
a sign that we are dealing with a normal phenomenon. 
We know many such "we's" which can easily be 
proved not to be of a normal character. To appre- 
ciate the connection between the "we" and the 
individual-' we must take into consideration the 
phenomena of the "we" which in their very nature 
guarantee the existence of the individual. 

Even to raise the question in this way may seem 
to be unjustified, however, since nature may have 
no interest in the individual, but only in the group, 
the species, the race in short, in the "we." The 
widespread assumption, in fact, is that nature is 
not interested in the individual. It is supposed to 
be wasteful of individuals, to have no other goal 
than the perpetuation of the species. General as it 
is, this assumption is in no way based on facts. 
Everywhere in nature we meet with individuals, not 
only in the realm of man but also in that of animals 
and plants. What we call kinds, races, and so on, 
are products of human thought in its generalizing 
aspect. And what appears to occur irrespective of 
individuals and as a waste of individuals can also 
be understood as a consequence of the imperfection 
of the single individual in a situation in which im- 
mense numbers of individuals coexist. How are we 
to understand the immense variety of forms, colors, 



210 HUMAN NATURE 

and ways of living, without assuming that they are 
all of importance to nature, an importance which is 
much greater than it usually appears to the human 
mind to be, especially in the scientific approach? On 
principle the scientific approach abstracts from par- 
ticulars and takes into consideration only what can 
be described in general terms. This is a procedure 
leading to negative statements not in accordance with 
nature. We shall stress later the fact that there 
is nothing negative in nature. Nature is always posi- 
tive. Does it not follow that the present is the center 
of importance? And is the present not always in- 
dividual? What we call a "species" is never present; 
it belongs to the past or to the future. Only the 
individual is present. Is not such an abstraction as 
species a special expression of human thinking, which 
alone can grasp the negative, and with that the past 
and the future? Let us remember in this connection 
that the patients we have been describing are unable 
to grasp the negative and the general, and unable, 
as well, to grasp the past and the future. They live 
in one dimension, in the concrete. We have traced 
this back to the impairment of the capacity for 
abstraction. Nature in general seems to live in only 
one dimension (the present), the dimension of the 
concrete, of the individual. Only the human being, 
and possibly some of the higher animals, goes beyond 
this dimension. 

My assumption that nature is concerned with the 
individual may appear to be merely a metaphysical 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 2 II 

belief. Yet it is certainly no more metaphysical than 
the idea which ascribes to nature a lack of concern 
with the individual and sees as its goal the preserva- 
tion of the species. 

From this point of view, not all "we" phenomena 
are real, but only those which guarantee the reali- 
zation of the individual. All other concepts of the 
relationship between the individual and other in- 
dividuals represent accidental connections related to 
a variety of factors, such as the concept of reflexes 
or of "higher centers," all of which are more or less 
inadequate. 

If we thus consider the "we" as secondary to the 
individual, the "we" should by no means be thought 
of simply as an extraneous and secondary connection 
between individuals. It is not simply a sum made up 
of individuals. Real group life, social life, is not an 
accidental living-together, nor is it based on a volun- 
tary "social contract." A concrete group life may 
develop in the first way, if individuals happen to 
live together under equal conditions and feel im- 
pelled to help each other against common difficulties. 
Yet real social life, whether under these conditions 
or under those in which a social unit is constructed 
by means of a "contract," will develop only if some 
genuine communion between its members exists. If 
this is not the case, the whole structure is shaken 
when conditions change. The political disasters of 
recent decades in Europe make an excellent case to 
illustrate the instability and insecurity of units built 



212 HUMAN NATURE 

up on the basis of external connections between men. 

The collapse of such social entities is caused by 
the incapacity of the "we" in question to guarantee 
natural ways of existence for individuals. The only 
"we" that is real and "natural," and constitutes a 
true social organization, is one which can do this. 
This shows that the "we" is determinable only 
through the individual, that he is actually the 
measure of its suitability, that it is secondary to him. 
Where it asserts its primacy, the existence not only 
of the individual but of the "we" is endangered. If 
the state pretends an inherent value independent of 
the rights of individuals (to take only one example), 
restriction of human nature takes place, with serious 
consequences to the existence of both individuals 
and state. 

This explanation implies a critical attitude toward 
the problem of collectivism. The term "collectivism" 
may mean a rational organization of society or a 
metaphysic entity as a thing in itself. In the first 
case, every endeavor to build a collective presupposes 
a certain idea for the manner of its organization. 
Collectivism per se cannot represent a goal. Every 
collectivistic endeavor uses collectivism as a means 
not always expressed but always intended for 
the realization of the best manner of existence for 
the individuals in the collective. Only if this is 
guaranteed does the collective have sense and will it 
have permanency. An organization which is unable 
to guarantee this is not a true collective. This 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 213 

collectivistic endeavor can be directed toward 
different ends, according to the idea one has of the 
nature of man. If one considers freedom as essential 
to human beings, any collectivistic organization is 
wrong i.e., contradicts itself which is not con- 
structed in such a way that the freedom of *all 
individuals is guaranteed. 

If collectivism is regarded as a hypostasized 
reality in the metaphysical or naturalistic sense, then 
any organization which matches the conception of 
this reality fits the purpose. The organization does 
not have to concern itself primarily with the in- 
dividual. However, collectivism on such a basis, 
whether in theory or in practice, is subject to the 
same criticism as any metaphysical or naturalistic 
dogma. It opposes the conception of man which 
considers freedom essential. The term "freedom" 
does not mean the arbitrary right of each individual 
to do what he likes laissez-faire, laissez-aller. On 
the contrary, it means the right and the inner 
necessity to actualize oneself, a right which, as we 
have seen, presupposes the possibility of actualiza- 
tion on the part of all other individuals. For freedom 
fundamentally presupposes the freedom of all others 
equality; not, indeed, equality in the simple 
political sense of the word, but equal rights and 
equal duties. The restriction of the personality 
involved in the latter must be considered a limitation 
caused by the living together of individuals under 
certain conditions, not as determined by any 



214 HUMAN NATURE 

metaphysical or natural law. Progress means the 
amelioration of these conditions to allow for a 
more and more adequate self-realization on the part 
of all individuals. The fact that a certain degree of 
restriction will probably always remain is a con- 
sequence of individuality, i.e., of the coexistence of 
individuals. 

As we have said, the individual is not independent 
of the "we." Yet he cannot exist without the "we"; 
he can realize his nature only within the group. 
The individual and the "we" depend upon each 
other. 

Even though the individual is primary to society, 
without question he is influenced to a very high 
degree by society. His life is determined by the 
habits, customs, and institutions characteristic of the 
society he lives in. The problem is how these habits 
and customs develop. It has sometimes been as- 
sumed that they emerge simply from the fact that 
this kind of association of beings exists, that they 
are products of a collective mind. From our point 
of view self-restriction and encroachment upon the 
freedom of others are the two basic aspects of all 
forms of living together, and, with that, of all 
social organization; they are not simply the me- 
chanically conditioned products of a society that 
preexists or takes primacy over individuals; rather, 
they emerge during the building up and constituting 
of a society. They are the avenues for the best 
possible self-actualization of all individuals forming 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 215 

that society, and by virtue of this they are instru- 
ments for the creation of the best possible society. It 
is true that there are ideas which are common to a 
group and they are often much more fixed and 
influential than the ideas of individuals but they 
are the products of the minds of individuals. They 
originate within society, and the actual living to- 
gether of individuals is a very important cause of 
their development, but they are built up, or at least 
accepted and transformed, by individuals. 

In this respect our concept is very close to the 
rule of the convergence of internal and external 
factors which the late William Stern introduced 
into psychology. It seems to me that modern an- 
thropology and social psychology have adduced 
sufficient evidence of this interaction or convergence. 
It is scarcely necessary to support this statement 
by recalling the variability of the I.Q. according to 
modifications in milieu. In his book, Experimental 
Social Psychology, Gardner Murphy has summarized 
the results of pertinent investigations in the state- 
ment that the I.Q. in the same children or in 
different children with equal endowments varies es- 
sentially according to environment. The dependence 
of the I.Q. to a very large degree upon environmental 
conditions has also been ascertained by Otto Kline- 
berg in comparative investigations dealing with 
negroes and with rural and urban population. Recent 
investigations in Iowa have even led to the assertion 
that the I.Q.'s of feeble-minded children can be 



2l6 HUMAN NATURE 

markedly improved by changes in environment. 
Perhaps the most striking illustration of the way 
in which this convergence operates is offered by the 
analysis of language, as, for instance, the naming 
of objects. From the linguistic studies of Wilhelm 
von Humboldt and of Ernst Cassirer, 4 and from the 
psychopathology of aphasia, we know that the 
function of naming objects does not represent a 
simple superficial connection between a thing and 
a word. We know that language is more than a 
mere reflection of outside objects in the mind, that it 
is rather a means in itself for building up the world 
in a particular way that is, in a categorical way. 
The categorical, or abstract, attitude is a capacity 
belonging to every human being and endows him 
with the ability to vary his perspective and to orient 
his conception of the world by a variety of frames 
of reference. If the language of civilized people 
differs from that of primitive ones, the reason lies 
not in differences in capacities but in differences 
in the use of the same capacities according to 
different environmental requirements. 

We have already explained the role of the ab- 
stract attitude in the process of building habits.* 
It plays a similar role in the building up of customs 
and institutions. Customs are built up in a historical 
development that covers thousands of years; they 
are transmitted from generation to generation, 

* See p. 135. 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 217 

modified and changed by our ancestors and by our 
fellow human beings of the present. 

To a great extent this transmission and acceptance 
of customs takes place during infancy and youth, 
and rather passively. In the adult, however, customs 
which are actually followed are integrated with the 
personality by the capacity for assuming the abstract 
attitude. As we have explained, conditioned re- 
sponses are established in early youth; it is not 
until they are transformed into genuine performances 
that they become the habits of the adult, and this in 
turn is possible only by virtue of the abstract 
attitude. The same is the case with the customs which 
are taken over by the individual. They can never 
become established without the abstract attitude, 
and it is responsible for the fact that an association 
between a definite stimulus and an act (whether 
accidental in origin or imposed by outer circum- 
stance) becomes a true custom. For a custom 
is never an external phenomenon, but is connected 
with the whole personality. Without the abstract 
attitude that is, insight into the significance of 
customs for the life of the individual and society 
its development is impossible. This attitude is a pre- 
requisite for the taking over of a custom and is 
particularly important for the modification of 
customs according to new conditions, which is in- 
dispensable to a living culture, since without this 
continual change there would be standstill and 
decay. 5 



2l8 HUMAN NATURE 

Persons with brain injuries demonstrate all this 
clearly. The customs they follow are those of their 
pre-morbid stage. They are unable to change these; 
on the contrary, they have abnormally rigid and 
fixed habitual modes of social behavior. As we have 
explained, they are able to find new adaptations 
and establish new habits only with the help of their 
healthy fellow men. And the adaptations acquired 
by this procedure are so connected with specific 
situations and correspond so closely to the particular 
organization of the patient's personality that they 
are unsuited to become the customs of a group. As 
a result of the homogeneity of environment in which 
patients live in a hospital, similar habits may 
originate in individuals, but never customs that are 
common to a group. And only this is characteristic 
of social habits. 

In short, such living together is not real social 
life. Consequently, these similar habits are very 
easily disturbed. Since the patients lack adequate 
centering and are very susceptible to immediate 
stimuli, they are always ready to react even to minute 
changes in their surroundings in a way that is not 
consistent with these habits. 

Thus we come to the conclusion that customs 
originate in society, but that their origin, still more 
their transmission, depends upon the abstract atti- 
tude on the part of the individuals concerned. They 
are accepted as belonging to the personality and are 
changed according to the needs of the situation by 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 219 

means of the abstract attitude. The faculty of trans- 
mitting customs as such belongs only to human 
beings. It is never observed in animals. It is true 
that one occasionally finds traits which might be 
called cultural, like the domestication of plants and 
the division of labor in some species of insects, *but 
these traits are not acquired by any individual crea- 
ture; they belong to the structural pattern of its 
species and therefore cannot be changed. Man has 
to acquire such customs all over again with each 
generation; only the capacity for transmission is 
inherited. Ruth Benedict says very correctly that 
"man is the culture-making animal." I should like 
to add that this faculty is an expression of his ability 
to grasp the abstract. 

- The development of an institution can be much 
more readily observed than that of a custom because 
it is built up before our eyes. There is no question 
that institutions originate as the result of reasonable 
deliberation in which the whole group participates 
more or less. The individual, being a member of 'the 
group, acknowledges them. 

To sum up, a habit is a means of adaptation on 
the part of the individual to the conditions of the 
nonhuman environment; habits help particularly to 
guarantee one's physical existence. A custom is a 
means of adaptation to the general conditions of life 
in a group. An institution is an adaptive measure 
that has to do with the socio-economic conditions 
of a group. Common to all these adaptive forms 



220 HUMAN NATURE 

is the fact that, once built up, they can function 
without continual voluntary acts on the part of the 
individual. They achieve a certain independence of 
the individual. The formation of habits calls for very 
little volitional participation on the part of the in- 
dividual; that of institutions calls for much. For this 
reason institutions vary greatly, and it is easy to 
misuse them. From all these adaptive processes 
there emerges a strong impulse toward action. They 
become valuable aids in the accomplishments of 
individuals and make the self-actualization of the 
organism easier; there is therefore a strong urge to 
preserve them. 

In the course of history many of the habits, 
customs, and institutions in civilization and culture 
have attained a certain emancipation from their 
original meaning, and thus govern human behavior 
without our being aware of their original purpose. 
In spite of the unjustified tyranny they may exercise 
and the obstacles they may offer to free development, 
they are maintained as long as they are to some 
degree embedded within the purposive setting of 
the social framework in which they play a part. 
If, however, this lack of relation reaches such a 
degree that the rules of conduct are practically de- 
tached from the real needs of a majority of the group, 
we are dealing with abnormal conditions. Limita- 
tions may then be imposed upon the life of the 
individual in such a way that sufficient leeway for 
self-realization is no longer conceded. 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 221 

The consequences of such a condition are cata- 
stropic reactions and anxiety, which the individual 
tries to overcome through attacks on customs and in- 
stitutions, on the government which attempts to 
preserve those institutions. If it is extensive enough, 
the confusion which arises from such a condition can 
be used by a minority to claim spuriously, in the 
name of society, the right to take over all power in 
order to protect society. If such a group is victorious, 
tyranny develops. Thus society comes to be divided 
into groups that rule and groups that are ruled in 
opposition to their own wishes, a state of affairs which 
is incompatible with the essential character of human 
nature because it contradicts freedom. 

The members of such a society are rather like the 
patient who lacks the ability to abstract and who 
thus becomes the victim of an abnormal response to 
outside stimuli. Like the sick person, they suffer from 
the limitation of their freedom and from anxiety, with 
its consequences (the shrinkage of the environment, 
dependence upon and submission to other people). 
And all this occurs under the necessity for main- 
taining physical and mental existence in some, even 
the most primitive, form. Such disturbances affect 
both the individual and society as long as an in- 
adequate relationship between the two, manifested 
in the abnormally exaggerated power of certain in- 
stitutions, prevails. Society is then in danger of being 
distorted into forms of organization which, the ruling 
minority to the contrary notwithstanding, do not 



222 HUMAN NATURE 

correspond to the nature of man. Irrational factors 
are thrust into the foreground by the minority in 
order to make acceptable and understandable an or- 
ganization which is not understandable by reason as 
such, because it is not adequate to human nature. 
Sudh a society is not really productive; and it is 
very insecure. Immense activity must be called into 
play to maintain the organization itself; because it 
has no stability within, it can be upheld only by the 
utilization of all the worst traits of human nature, 
by mechanical means, by force, by the state of anxiety 
which tyrannical rulers, as we have explained, often 
produce intentionally as a means of tuning the spirit 
of the masses to one key and level of action. An 
external order only hides the disorder which exists 
below the surface, splendid as that surface some- 
times is. 

Such a pseudo-social organization may be com- 
pared with an organism in disease, and we may speak 
of such a society as sick. Normal society means a 
type of organization through which the fullest possi- 
ble actualization on the part of all individuals is 
assured. This presupposes the possibility that both 
aspects of human nature, self-restriction and en- 
croachment, can be effective in a balanced fashion. 
The attempt to build up social life based on the 
notion of a drive to submission or to aggression, or 
of an antagonistic struggle between the two, is futile. 
If we acknowledge and utilize social organization as 
an instrument by means of which all individuals may 



THE INDIVIDUAL AND OTHERS 223 

actualize themselves to an optimal degree, then a 
genuine social life becomes possible. Only under 
these conditions is a social organization capable 
of doing justice to every individual; only this makes 
it a real social organization and secures its dura- 
tion. Far as we may be from realizing such a society 
nowadays, it seems to me extremely important to be 
aware of the fundamentals on which its possibility 
is grounded. Only in this way can we discover the 
concrete causes of failure in a given situation and the 
appropriate ways to correct the failure. 

Failure, or a series of failures, may be the conse- 
quence of a wrong procedure in the realization of 
a sound idea; it does not necessarily speak against 
the correctness of that idea itself. In the same way, 
success, taken as the sole measure, does not speak 
for the correctness of the underlying idea; only suc- 
cess in accordance with the essence of human nature 
constitutes a real success. And the basic reason for 
failure in this respect, it seems to me, lies in the 
misinterpretation of human nature. Ultimately all 
failures in social organization are caused by an un- 
derestimation of the significance of the abstract 
attitude and by a misjudgment of the detrimental 
influence which can emanate from human traits if 
one changes them through artificial isolation. With 
the help of the abstract attitude the fallacy which 
is basic to all false social organization can be dis- 
closed. 



IX 

THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION" IN 
SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY 

IF ONE ranges the facts of history against the asser- 
tion that man's capacity for abstract behavior, for 
freedom and self-restriction, has paramount signifi- 
cance for the organization of social life, and if in 
particular one considers the present world situation, 
the idea may seem quite wrong, not to say ridiculous. 
If the capacity for abstract behavior were really the 
highest attribute of human nature, why, one may ask, 
are human beings not able to build up a social or- 
ganization that will guarantee human existence at 
least to some degree? How is it possible that human 
ingenuity should be used essentially for the purpose 
of destruction? How is it possible that hatred and 
vandalism should govern the world to such an extent 
not only that the civilization of western Europe is in 
danger of being wiped out, but that human existence 
in its widest expansion seems to be menaced by a 
struggle of all against all? How is all this possible in 
view of the fact that we possess the capacity of 
reasoning? 

Such an objection indicates a failure to under- 
stand the dialectic procedure of cognition. Errone- 
ously, it considers as ends conditions which repre- 



THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION" 225 

sent only transitory states in the process of the 
human being's coming to terms with the world. In 
our discussion of acquiring such a simple skill as 
bicycling, it was shown that many wrong actions are 
necessary before the situation which makes the cor- 
rect performance possible is found. As we have 
demonstrated, all misinterpretation of the phenomena 
of life originates in the application of the analytic 
method; we can attain adequate results only by a 
special type of cognition, an activity that transcends 
this analytic procedure. We have to admit, however, 
that this method in itself contains the danger of 
error. If it is so difficult to find the procedure through 
which bicycling such a simple form of coming to 
terms with the world ! becomes possible, how 
much more difficult it is to find an adequate way for 
a large group of human beings to live together, not 
to mention mankind. 

The dialectic point of view will prevent us from 
considering any given state of affairs as a permanent 
one and as the sole expression of what the human 
being is capable of in principle. We will be mindful 
of the fact that we are always dealing with partitive 
results, which we are not allowed to take for granted 
as absolutes. Every historical event, as it goes into 
the mere factual record, shows definitely the charac- 
teristics of a process in isolation; it is a more or less 
successful attempt to actualize human beings with 
the help of society. The more it thrusts into the 
foreground single tendencies of men, the more it 



226 HUMAN NATURE 

demands its own recognition as an absolute and 
emancipated value, the less successful it is. The 
social order which then develops is not adequate for 
a great number of its members. Because its isolation 
and exaggeration of one normal trait, aggressiveness, 
it isneither productive nor secure, a caricature of 
real society. 

Our methodological point of view will lead us to 
avoid the fallacy of overestimating a temporary and 
incidental condition. We shall not forget the needs 
of the true nature of man. We shall not let ourselves 
be deceived by false idols, nor commit suicide by 
following blindfold the tendencies and orders of a 
tyranny which denies human nature. On the other 
hand, we shall be capable of avoiding the attitude of 
hopeless skepticism into which so many are driven 
in the present situation. 

My predecessor in these lectures, fitienne Gilson, 
has said very truly, "In philosophy skepticism is 
defeatism." x To this I should like to add^thaTthe 
statement applies not only to philosophy but to all 
knowledge and action. Skepticism is not in accord 
with the phenomenon of life. Life is always positive. 
Only human thought, through the isolating method, 
produces the negative. Everybody who has to do 
with living beings, especially with human beings, 
knows that in practice negative procedure can play 
a merely transient role and that it is fruitful only in 
relation to positive measures. This concerns the 
educator as well as the physician. And it refutes 
skepticism in principle. 



THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION" 227 

Closer consideration reveals that the skeptical 
standpoint is always a subterfuge, as Max Hork- 
heimer, 2 in particular, has pointed out. Even when 
it appears as a philosophical attitude, it is not genu- 
ine, but a secondary phenomenon, a phenomenon of 
escape from unbearable conditions. In his inability 
to realize himself, in his struggle with given condi- 
tions, the individual withdraws into himself. He is 
not aware of the danger involved in this mental isola- 
tion, of the shrinkage of his personality and the 
mental suicide which this attitude implies. It is con- 
cealed from him by a subterfuge in an individualistic 
ideology which glorifies the ego as part of a selected 
aristocratic class. His existence would be impossible 
without a privileged economic status, by which he is 
supported as the mental patient is by his fellow men. 
In skepticism we are dealing with a special form of 
the attempt to exist without taking into consideration 
the existence of others, with their justifiable demands. 
Another form is to be found in the hedonistic atti- 
tude. 3 This attitude, too, tries to avoid any partici- 
pation in the difficulties and unhappiness of the life of 
man and confines the meaning of life to the pursuit 
of pleasure; it shuns grief and seeks escape in pleas- 
ure. This standpoint is close to the Freudian idea 
that human behavior is understandable on the basis 
of the pleasure principle, or, to put it in another way, 
that the purpose of drives is to find release from 
hidden urges. The hedonist tries especially to find a 
release from tension. I need scarcely recall our 
conclusion that from such a point of view normal 



228 HUMAN NATURE 

behavior is never understandable. It is not under- 
standable in this case because the hedonistic tend- 
ency originates in the abnormal isolation of one 
attribute of human nature. It is impossible in this 
way to achieve real self-actualization, to "live" in 
the true sense of the word. The hedonist may not be 
aware of the situation because his judgment is dis- 
turbed, especially in the abstract attitude, by the 
narcotization in which he lives. In consequence he 
is incapable of experiencing the positive character of 
joy; he experiences only the release from tension and 
the absence of pain and grief. Like Freud's concept 
of drives, the hedonistic way of thinking deprives the 
individual of the true experience of the joy and 
beauty of life. It can never guarantee the existence 
of the individual or of society; it can be held only for 
a time because it disintegrates the personality and 
with that prevents self -actualization. Enjoyment of 
life, happiness, and self-actualization belong together. 
Enjoyment of life is a special type of self-actualiza- 
tion, the happiness which originates in the individ- 
ual's adequate coming to terms with the world. 
Because this scarcely ever remains constant, happi- 
ness can hold the center of the stage only for a certain 
time. But during the rest of the time it does not 
vanish ; it operates in the background, giving the life 
of the individual the special flavor which is so char- 
acteristic of the well-adjusted person. Any attempt 
to secure unceasing happiness is destined to failure; 
where it appears as a constant phenomenon we are 



THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION" 229 

dealing with pathology, as, for example, in the 
maniac. The hedonistic attitude is a kind of with- 
drawal from the world, and such an attitude, what- 
ever its cause, will never enable the individual to 
find an existence adequate to his nature. This holds 
even when the individual subjectively experiences it 
as moral, as, for example, in the case of Epicurus. 
Basically, hedonism has its origin in skepticism. In 
both we are dealing with the isolation of the indi- 
vidual from society; in both one tries to save one's 
own personality at any price, even the sacrifice of 
one's fellow beings. Both attitudes fail because they 
deny human nature. 

Opposed to this attitude we meet another, in which 
the individual sacrifices himself for the sake of his 
fellow men. It is much more difficult to prove the 
ambiguity of this attitude. Some sacrifices are rightly 
to be considered an expression of an unusually high 
development of human nature. But self-sacrifice in 
itself is not of value. It is of value only if it is im- 
portant for the actualization of the individual; it is 
of value only if the rescue of others is of such impor- 
tance to the individual that his own self-realization 
demands this sacrifice. This is a border situation 
similar to one we have already discussed, in which 
voluntary suicide is sometimes the last way out in 
the attempt to preserve the personality. One has to 
be very careful in the evaluation of self-sacrifice, 
because it is often nothing more than an escape from 
the difficulties of normal self-actualization. If society 



230 HUMAN NATURE 

has to ask for general self-sacrifice on the part of its 
members, then there is something wrong with the 
organization of that society. I do not mean to deny 
that an emergency may arise in which the individual 
has to sacrifice himself for the sake of society. But 
the individual ought always to have the possibility of 
making the decision for himself. Only then will the 
sacrifice have real value. 

I am aware of the incomplete and scanty treatment 
I have given the problem of social organization, 
viewed in relation to our findings concerning the 
normal organism and the organism in disease. I be- 
lieve, however, that the preceding discussion has 
prepared us sufficiently to warrant the following 
broader conclusion: Any attempt to determine what 
a normal social organization should be like is faced 
with the same epistemological difficulties as that of 
determining the characteristics of an organism. 4 In- 
dividuals are not separately existing and discrete 
units of the social "organism," and the latter does 
not constitute merely a sum total of these units. Just 
as the functional and material structure of an organ- 
ism guarantees the normal behavior of its parts, so 
the organization and behavior of the social commu- 
nity must guarantee the existence of the individual. 
The study of a given social organization, like the 
study of an organism, has to be based upon the study 
of phenomena isolated by the analytic method; and 
we cannot proceed directly from these to a charac- 
terization of the whole which social organization 



THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION" 231 

represents. We are confronted once more with the 
limitation of the analytic method which was dis- 
cussed in the first chapter. 

When we deal with living beings, science of the 
analytic type can never speak the last word. In the 
last few decades it has been realized more, and more 
that medical treatment cannot be based on science 
of this type alone. The same holds true for educa- 
tion and for practical guidance in politics. But this 
restriction of the value of science in no way justifies 
renouncing this form of cognition entirely, and sur- 
rendering to mysticism and irrational speculation. 
Science maintains its great value no less when we are 
conscious of its limits. 

The analytic scientific approach remains the only 
one by means of which phenomena can be discovered 
in a systematic way. It is the only approach by 
means of which we can achieve that broad orbit of 
empirical data which renders it possible to discover 
which phenomena are relevant for the understanding 
of living beings and which not. This is its positive 
value. It also has great value in the negative sense, 
though this is often not taken into consideration with 
the seriousness it deserves. The unbiased registering 
of all phenomena which the analytic method produces 
necessarily brings about a critical attitude concerning 
the value of these phenomena for gaining a real 
understanding of the object in question human 
nature. In the field we are interested in, this critical 
attitude is of the greatest importance. Science 



232 HUMAN NATURE 

thereby reveals the danger of applying its piecemeal 
results to situations of inherently different structure 
and of making generalizations in that way. So, for 
example, when one makes conditioned responses the 
basis for understanding the natural behavior of an 
animal, or when one tries to explain human behavior 
on the basis of the results of studies of animals, or 
vice versa, the critical attitude reveals the error to 
which we have fallen victim. By scrutinizing the 
conditions and the consequences of isolation it can 
demonstrate the danger involved in this procedure, 
the datfger of taking results obtained under these 
conditions as absolute. For this reason many so- 
called "scientific" results in the fields in question are 
open to a very serious criticism. 

The critical attitude cautions us not to attempt an 
understanding of nature directly on the basis of the 
phenomena gained by the scientific method and 
refers us to the need of dialectic procedure. It re- 
veals, further, the necessity for transcending the 
imminent situations of the analytic method if we 
wish to understand human nature and to act in its 
terms. 

As a consequence, the personality of the scientist 
acquires a particular significance in relation to the 
task set before him. The scholar in physical science 
is usually confined to an elaboration of that part of 
the world which becomes prominent through the 
analytic procedure. The biologist, in addition to his 
consideration of physicochemical phenomena, is con- 



THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION" 233 

fronted with living beings and has to do justice to 
them, especially when he has to deal with men. This 
difference makes the actions of the' physical scientist 
and the biologist very different. 

The technologist's interference with nature means 
violence to nature; it is directed against the forees of 
nature in order to master them for the benefit of man. 
Even where the technologist utilizes and exploits 
natural energies by direct manipulation, he is able to 
establish and maintain his use of them only in oppo- 
sition to nature, by building up protective walls 
against nature. Within these walls nature is not 
alive, but knowledge resulting from analytic pro- 
cedure achieves practical utilization in the form of 
machines. Only when they are protected in this way 
against the threatening forces of nature are machines 
able to endure. 

The biologist acts in this manner only when he is 
not interested in living creatures as such, as, for ex- 
ample, when he breeds animals for human purposes, 
or when his lack of knowledge prevents his real 
understanding of the nature of a living creature and 
its appropriate environment. Since biological knowl- 
edge in most cases lacks completeness, we are fre- 
quently forced to act in this way, though our goal is 
something quite different that is, (toprovide^ the 
kind of environment ^which allows f orTlie^ost^com- 
pletifreal^^ 

This manifests itself in the activities of both the 
physician and the educator, which in this respect 



234 HUMAN NATURE 

take on much the same complexion. But in education 
we approach still more closely the boundaries of 
human perfection as they are given in the imperfect 
knowledge of pedagogic means and ends grounded, 
moreover, in man's imperfect adaptation to the world 
in which he has to live. Many pedagogic measures 
spring from the necessity of adapting the individual 
to the norms of the civilization and culture of which 
he is a part, a necessity which must be borne. 5 It is 
not sufficient to encourage and help the child in the 
development of his innate potentialities. This is the 
ideal of any biologically founded education, which is 
concerned with the development of the individual 
according to its nature, but the demands of civiliza- 
tion compel the educator to exercise, to a certain ex- 
tent, mere drill; that is, to force the pupil to activities 
not entirely suited to his nature. 

It is apparent, then, that in all scientific dealing 
with living beings, particularly with human beings, 
the personality of the scientist plays an eminent part. 
We should not lose sight of this fact. The biologist 
and the physician have to encroach upon the freedom 
of other human beings, and they have to do this on 
the basis of their own decisions. All success depends 
ultimately upon their personal judgment and is a 
matter of their own responsibility. We know that 
these two factors are based upon the capacity for 
abstraction. Thus the critical analysis of the sub- 
stance of the scientific approach again discloses from 
another angle the significance of that capacity which 



THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION" 235 

our entire discourse has asserted we think justly 
to be essential to the nature of man. This analysis, 
on the other hand, may keep us from an overestima- 
tion of this capacity. We do not forget that in speak- 
ing of the abstract attitude we are dealing merely 
with a phenomenon revealed by the analytic method 
and that it can be evaluated only in reference to the 
whole organism. With this in mind, we consider other 
factors important for human behavior: concrete be- 
havior and the constants that are characteristic of 
species and individuals. Only in a harmonious ac- 
tualization of all these factors does human life appear 
to be normal. Whenever one of them comes abnor- 
mally to the foreground we meet with abnormal 
phenomena, with all the attributes of phenomena in 
isolation. 

As we have seen, what kind of behavior, what 
special factor, is in the foreground depends upon the 
whole situation, particularly upon the environment. 
Thus the human being may appear in very different 
aspects. But human life will never be comprehensible 
if we take any one of these aspects as the sole char- 
acteristic of the individual or group. All misunder- 
standings of other individuals, all misinterpretations 
of the behavior of other people, are grounded basi- 
cally in such a wrong procedure. For we are not 
dealing with individual differences in principle, but 
with many factors, each characteristic of all human 
beings, which are arranged in various ways in various 
individuals and groups. Thus some normal persons 



236 HUMAN NATURE 

prefer the concrete attitude, others the abstract; in 
others language dominates, in still others vision. 
There are similar differences in peoples. The differ- 
ences between primitive and civilized peoples, in 
particular, it becomes more and more evident, are 
really only variations in the arrangement of the 
same factors, corresponding to general differences in 
life and environment. Only from this standpoint, 
which is not only based on but enforced through a 
critical use of science, can one individual do justice 
to another, one people to another, one religion to 
another, one form of civilization to another. Only 
from this standpoint are justice and morals possible. 
Only from this standpoint do we achieve the humility 
that is in keeping with the imperfection of our coming 
to terms with the world. Only this attitude prevents 
us from taking as absolute, as the expression of 
human nature, one of those imperfect formations in 
which human nature appears at a given time. 

We recognize further that a more nearly perfect 
realization can take place only through a process of 
mutual adaptation between peoples, which will per- 
mit a fuller actualization of all the different factors 
that, harmoniously combined, represent human 
nature. From this cooperative work nobody need be 
excluded except those who deliberately construct 
barriers and who thus decline cooperation in prin- 
ciple. In this latter situation we have to do with such 
an essential deviation from human nature that mu- 
tual understanding is impossible. We may be able to 



THE FALLACY OF "ISOLATION" 237 

understand those who deviate in this way as anoma- 
lies, as insane or criminal, but they can never under- 
stand us and they can never become normal members 
of any human social organization. There is no choice 
forjsocjcty but to protect its members againstjuch 
individuals or groups7~How this protection caa be 
broughF55out I cannot even suggest here. I wish to 
stress only one fact: in our stand against these 
offenders of society we are not justified in doing any- 
thing which opposes human nature in principle. 
This would be bound to fail, because the very ex- 
istence of society, which is based on human nature, 
would be endangered by such a procedure. 

It is true that emergencies may arise to force us, 
in self-defense, to use methods fundamentally op- 
posed to the needs of human nature. Otherwise we 
should face the danger of seeing the destruction of 
all that we consider essential to civilized human life, 
perhaps even the danger of being rooted out phys- 
ically. We must never forget, however, that such 
situations are abnormal ones and that our actions 
can be justified only if they are regarded as tem- 
porary expedients. If we do, we may forfeit the very 
things we are seeking to defend. 

In the state of despair in which so many people 
find themselves at present, we must always remem- 
ber that we are very far from solving the problem 
of the adequate social organization of mankind, that 
we are only on the road to a goal which may be 
reached in the future nobody knows when but 



238 HUMAN NATURE 

that we have no reason to despair if we proceed in 
a way determined by our knowledge of human 
nature. 

To accept this task demands two faculties in par- 
ticular: first, readiness to restrict oneself and to 
encroach upon others in the interest both of one's 
own actualization and that of others, and, second, 
courage in the struggle against those resistances of 
the inner and outer world which oppose human na- 
ture faculties which one might consider the two 
paramount manifestations of the highest capacity 
of man, the capacity for freedom. 



NOTES 



NOTES 

CHAPTER I 

1. See C. M. CHILD, The Physiological Foundation of Be- 
havior (New York, 1924) ; G. E. COGIIILL, Anatomy and the 
Problem of Behavior (New York, 1929); C. J. HERRICK, "Ana- 
tomical Patterns," in Physiological Zoology (New York, 1929) ; 
K. S. LASHLEY, Brain Mechanisms and Intelligence (Chicago, 
1929) ; ADOLF MEYER, "Critical Review of the Data and General 
Method and Deduction of Modern Neurology," Journal of Com- 
parative Neurology, vol. VIII, 1898; TRIGANT BURROW, The 
Biology of Human Conflict (New York, 1938) ; KURT GOLDSTEIN, 
The Organism (New York, 1939). 

2. See KURT GOLDSTEIN, "Die Neuroregulation," Verhandlungen 
der Gesellschaft fur innere Medizin und Kinder heilkunde, vol. 
XLII, 1932; "Zur Frage der Restitution nach umschriebenem 
Hirndefect," Schweizer Archiv fur Neurologic und Psychiatric, 
vol. XIII, 1923; and The Organism, pp. 427 ff. 

3. MAX SCHELER, Die Stellung des Menschen im Kosmos 
(Darmstadt, 1928). 

4. G. W. ALLPORT, Personality, A Psychological Interpretation 
(New York, 1937). 

5. See GOLDSTEIN, The Organism, chap. IX. 

6. See GOLDSTEIN, "Zur Theorie der Funktion des Nerven- 
systems," Archiv jur Psychiatric, vol. LXX, 1925, pp. 370 ff., and 
The Organism, chap. III. 

7. This phenomenon, long known in psychology, falls under 
what is known as the Weber-Fechner law. This law says that 
discrimination depends upon relative rather than absolute intensi- 
ties. The facts were established by E. H. Weber and G. T. Fechner 
more than half a century ago in investigations of perception and 
discrimination of weights. Weber's problem was: If we compare 
two weights in succession, how large must the difference in weight 
be to enable us to tell which is the heavier? He found that the 
difference which was required was not an absolute quantity but 



242 NOTES 

depended upon the relation of the first weight to the second weight 
(a ratio of about i to 30 for good discrimination). Further in- 
vestigations with other stimuli brought him to the general con- 
clusion that correct comparison required a constant quantitative 
relationship between the two stimuli. Later Fechner, experimenting 
in the visual field, got similar results. In general, one can say that 
reactions do not increase in the same proportion as the increase of 
the stimuli. In order for the responses to increase in arithmetical 
proportion (i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 . . .), the corresponding stimuli must 
increase in geometrical proportion (2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 . . .). In 
other words, the effect of a given stimulus depends upon the condi- 
tion of the organism at the moment of stimulation, upon the state 
of excitation at that moment (initial situation). 

Closer investigations of the Weber-Fechner law have shown that 
it is not valid in all situations in the same way, and, what is par- 
ticularly interesting for us, that the figures diverge greatly from 
the theoretical expectation at extremely low and high intensities. 
It is probable that in very extreme states of excitation there is a 
reversal of the reactions. As yet we have no systematic investiga- 
tions to prove this in weight discrimination. In some somatic 
reactions, however, this reversal can be shown very well. The 
study of certain drugs, with their characteristic reactions, yields 
us good examples. We know that adrenalin, the extract of the 
adrenal gland, increases the tension of the muscles of the blood 
vessels, the tension of muscles of some visceral organs, such as the 
stomach, and so on. If one injects a small amount of this drug, 
the tension of some muscles increases to a degree corresponding 
to the amount of the injected drugs. But the degree of tension of 
the muscle at the time of injection determines what the change of 
the tension will be. If the tension at the time of injection is below 
a certain level (below average tension), the effect will be greater 
than if it were in the average state of tension. If the tension is 
above average, the effect of the same amount of injection will be 
less; while in a very high state of tension, the effect will be re- 
versed, and there will no longer be an increase of tension but a 
decrease. To give an example, the relaxed stomach contracts under 
adrenalin, the contracted stomach relaxes. We know of many 
similar examples, particularly in the field of the vegetative nervous 
system. Thus we have evidence of the fact that the same stimultts 



NOTES 243 

has a different effect when it touches the organism during various 
states of excitation. The effect is to be understood only if we 
consider it not merely in terms of the working of the stimulus, 
but also in terms of the tendency of the organism to return to the 
average state of excitation. If the stimulated region is in a low 
state of excitation, then a stimulus which usually has the effect of 
producing a particular degree of excitation may produce a stronger 
reaction because it will be working in the same direction as the 
tendency to return to the average state. If the stimulated region 
is in a state of excitation close to the average state, the same 
stimulus will act less forcibly. If it is in a state of excitation above 
average, then the stimulus leads to a reaction of opposite charac- 
ter; that is, it diminishes the excitation, because the tendency to 
return to the average state is effective in addition to the working 
of the stimulus; if the stimulus were operating alone, it would 
result in the expected increase of excitation. This tendency is the 
basis for the maintenance of the threshold in spite of the fact that 
stimulation always changes the organism and its sensitivity to 
further stimulation. In normal life, after a period of time, excita- 
tion which has been changed by a stimulus becomes equalized, 
returns to its normal state of excitation. Thus when a new 
stimulus reaches the organism it is again in a state in which the 
threshold to stimuli is constant. This equalization process guar- 
antees the equality of the threshold, and with that the stability 
and the existence of the organism. Therefore we speak of equali- 
zation as the basic biological phenomenon. How important this 
equalization is for the organism may be demonstrated by the fact 
that, when the organism is responding in an abnormal way (having 
lost this average, or mean, state through abnormal conditions), it 
responds to a new stimulation not with the reaction generally 
evoked but by a return to the average state of excitation. In 
connection with this problem, see I. H. WILDER, "Ein unbeachtetes 
biologisches Gesetz, sein Bedeutung fur Forschung und Praxis," 
Wiener klinische Wochenschrift, vol. II, 1939, and GOLDSTEIN, The 
Organism, pp. 73 ff., where other examples are mentioned. 

8. On the problem of isolation, see GOLDSTEIN, The Organism, 

PP. 133 ff. 

9. EDGAR RUBIN, Visuell wahrgenommene Figuren (Copen- 
hagen, 1931). See also MOLLY HARROWER, "Some Factors Deter- 



244 NOTES 

mining Figure-Ground Articulation," British Journal of Psychology, 
vol. XXII, 1936, and "Changes in Figure-Ground Perception in 
Patients with Cortical Lesions," British Journal of Psychology, 
vol. XXX, 1939. 

10. ERNST CASSIRER, Philosophic der symbolischen Formen 
(Berlin, 1929), III, 26. 

11. See GOLDSTEIN, The Organism, p. 98. 

ifc. See WILLIAM JAMES, The Will to Believe, and Other 

Essays (New York, 1897). 

13. R. B. PERRY, In the Spirit of William James (New Haven, 
1938). 

CHAPTER II 

1. On the problem of "archaic thinking," see ALFRED STORCH, 
"The Primitive Archaic Forms of Inner Experiences and Thought 
in Schizophrenia," Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, Mono- 
graph Series, no. 36, 1924. 

2. There is an immense amount of medical literature on the 
subject. A few books and articles particularly suited to non- 
medical readers are: HENRY HEAD, Aphasia and Kindred Disorders 
of Speech (New York, 1926) ; KURT GOLDSTEIN and ADHEMAR 
GELB, Psychologische Analysen hirnpathologischer Fdlle (Leipsig, 
1920), partially translated in W. D. ELLIS, Source Book of Gestalt 
Psychology (New York, 1938), 26-30; KURT GOLDSTEIN, "The 
Problem of the Meaning of Words," Journal of Psychology, vol. 
II, 1936, and "The Modifications of Behavior Consequent to Cere- 
bral Lesions," Psychiatric Quarterly, vol. X, 1936; THEODORE 
WEISENBURG and KATHARINE MCBRIDE, Aphasia (New York, 1935) ; 
KARL ZUCKER, "An Analysis of Disturbed Function in Aphasia," 
Brain, vol. LVII, 1934; KURT GOLDSTEIN, Die Behandlung, 
Fursorge und Begutachtung der Hirnverletzten (Leipsig, 1918) . 

3. For the problem of localization see CARL MONAKOW and 
RICHARD MOURGUE, Biologische Einfiihrung in das Studium der 
Neurologie (Stuttgart, 1930) ; KURT GOLDSTEIN, "Lokalisation in 
der Grosshirnrinde," Handbuch der normalen und pathologischen 
Physiologie, vol. X, 1927, and The Organism (New York, 1939) ; 
K. S. LASHLEY, "Functional Determinants of Cerebral Localisation," 
Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry, vol. XXXVIII, 1937. 



NOTES 245 

4. KURT GOLDSTEIN and ADHEMAR GELB, Psychologische 
Analysen hirnpathologischer Falle (Leipsig, 1920) ; KURT GOLD- 
STEIN, "The Significance of the Frontal Lobes for Mental Perform- 
ances," Journal of Neurology and Psycho pathology, vol. XVII, 
1936. 

5. See KURT GOLDSTEIN and S. E. KATZ, "The Psychopathology 
of Pick's Disease," Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry, vol. 
XXXVIII, 1937. * 

6. On the problem of the impairment of abstract behavior see 
GOLDSTEIN and GELB, "t)ber Farbennamenamnesie," Psychologische 
Forschung, vol. VI, 1925; M. M. BOLLES and KURT GOLDSTEIN, 
"A Study of Impairment of Abstract Behavior in Schizophrenics," 
Psychiatric Quarterly, vol. XII, 1938; A. B. NADEL, "A Qualitative 
Analysis of Behavior Following Cerebral Lesions," Archives of 
Psychology, vol. 224, 1938; EUGENIA HANFMANN and JACOB 
KASANIN, "A Method for the Study of Concept Formation," 
Journal of Psychology, vol. Ill, 1937, and Journal of Psychiatry, 
vol. XCV, 1938; EUGENIA HANFMANN, "Analysis of the Thinking 
Disorder in a Case of Schizophrenia," Archives of Neurology and 
Psychiatry, vol. XLI, 1939; M. M. BOLLES, "The Basis of Perti- 
nence," Archives of Psychology, vol 212, 1937; KURT GOLDSTEIN, 
"Frontal Lobotomy and Impairment of Abstract Attitude," Jour- 
nal of Nervous and Mental Disease, vol. no, no. 2, 1949. 

7. On the problem of art and mental disease see especially 
HANS PRINZHORN, Die Bildnerei der Geisteskranken (Berlin, 1922). 

8. For the block test see GOLDSTEIN and BOLLES, "A Study of 
Impairment of Abstract Behavior in Schizophrenics," Psychiatric 
Quarterly, vol. XII, 1938; NADEL, "A Qualitative Analysis of Be- 
havior Following Cerebral Lesions," Archives of Psychology, vol. 
224, 1938; KURT GOLDSTEIN and MARTIN SCHKERLR, ''Abstract 
and Concrete Behavior- An Experimental Study with Special 
Tests," Psychological Monographs, vol. 53, no. 2, 1941. 

CHAPTER III 

1. Sec HKNRY HKAD, Aphasia and Kindred Disorders of Speech 
(New York, 1926); THEODORE WEISENBURG and KATHARINE 
McBRiDE, Aphasia (New York, 1935); KURT GOLDSTEIN, Vber 
Aphasie (Zurich, 1927), and Language and Language Disturbances 
(New York, 1948). 

2. See KURT GOLDSTEIN and ADHEMAR GELB, Psychologische 
Analysen hirnpathologischer Falle (Leipsig, 1920); KURT GOLD- 



246 NOTES 

STEIN, "The Problem of the Meaning of Words Based upon Ob- 
servation of Aphasic Patients," Journal of Psychology, vol. II, 
1936; "On Naming and Pseudonaming," Word, vol. 2, no. i, 1946; 
ERNST CASSIRER, Philosophic der symbolischen Formen, vol. II 
(Berlin, 1928). 

3. EVA ROTHMANN, "Untersuchung eines Falles von umschrie- 
bener Hirnschadigung mit Storungen auf verschiedenen Lei- 
stungsgebieten," Schweizer Archiv fur Neurologic und Psychiatric, 
vol. XXXIII, 1933. 

CHAPTER IV 

1. See KURT GOLDSTEIN, "The Significance of the Frontal Lobes 
for Mental Performances," Journal of Neurology and Psycho- 
pathology, vol. XVII, 1936, and WILHELM SIEKMANN, "Psycho- 
logische Analyse eines falles Rat," Psychologische Forschung, vol. 
XVI, 1932- 

2. See GOLDSTEIN, The Organism, pp. 35 ff. 

3. See HEINRICH KLUEVER, Behavior Mechanisms in Monkeys 
(Chicago, 1933)- 

4. See KURT KOFFKA'S distinction between geographical and 
behavioral milieu: KOFFKA, Principles of Gestalt Psychology (New 
York, 1935). 

5. See SIGMUND FREUD, Hemmung, Symptom, und Angst 
(Leipsig, 1926) ; WILLIAM STERN, Psychology of Early Childhood 
(New York, 1931); KURT GOLDSTEIN, "Zum Problem der Angst," 
Allgemeine Zeitschrift fur Psychotherapie, vol. II, 1927, and The 
Organism, pp. 291 ff.; S0REN KIERKEGAARD, Der Begriff der Angst 
(Jena, 1923); KAREN HORNEY, New Ways in Psychoanalysis 
(New York, 1939); ROLLO MAY, The Meaning of Anxiety (New 
York, 1950). 

CHAPTER V 

1. For this theory see G. W. ALLPORT, Personality: A Psycho- 
logical Interpretation (New York, 1937). 

2. See C. J. HERRICK, The Brains of Rats and Men (Chicago, 
1926) ; G. E. COGHILL, Anatomy and the Problem of Behavior 
(New York, 1929) ; K. S. LASHLEY, Brain Mechanisms and /- 
telligence (Chicago, 1929) ; ALBRECHT BETHE, "Plastizitat und 
Centrenlehre," Handbuch der normalen und pathologischen Physi- 



NOTES 247 

ologie, vol. XV, 1930; KURT GOLDSTEIN, "t)ber die Plastizitat des 
Organismus," Handbuch der normalen und pathologischen Physi- 
ologic, vol. XV, 1930. 

3. On the theory of reflexes, see JOHN DEWEY, "The Reflex 
Arc Concept in Psychology," Psychological Review, vol. Ill, 1896. 
KURT GOLDSTEIN, The Organism (New York, 1939), lists the per- 
tinent literature. 

4. PAUL HOFFMANN and ERNST KRETSCHMER, Untersuchun^en 
uber Eigenreflexe (Berlin, 1922). 

5. HANS DRIESCH, Philosophic des Organischen (Leipsig, 1928). 

6. See JOHN DEWEY, "The Reflex Arc Concept in Psychology," 
Psychological Review, vol. Ill, 1896; R. S. WOODWORTH, Dynamic 
Psychology (New York, 1926) ; ALLPORT, Personality, A Psycho- 
logical Interpretation (New York, 1937); HEINRICH KLUEVER, Be- 
havior Mechanisms in Monkeys (Chicago, 1933) ; KURT KOFFKA, 
Principles of Gestalt Psychology (New York, 1935) ; I. R. KANTOR. 
A Survey of the Science of Psychology (Bloomington, Ind., 1933) ; 
R. H. WHEELER, The Science of Psychology (New York, 1940) ; 
I. W. CARTER, JR., "An Experimental Study of Psychological Stim- 
ulus Response," Psychological Record, vol. II, 1938. 

7. E. C. TOLMAN, in Psychological Review, vol. XLV, 1938. 

8. C. L. HULL, "Mind, Mechanism, and Adaptive Behavior," 
Psychological Review, vol. XLIV, 1937. 

9. L. W. GELLERMANN, "Form Discrimination in Chimpanzees," 
Journal of Genetic Psychology, vol. XLII, 1933; K. F. MUEN- 
ZINGER, "Motivation in Learning," Journal of Comparative 
Psychology, vols. XVII, XX, XXI, 1934-37 (seven papers). 

10. "An Experimental Study of Psychological Stimulus Re- 
sponse," Psychological Record, vol. II, 1938. 

u. See I. P. PAVLOV, Conditioned Reflexes (Oxford, 1927). 
An enormous amount of literature has been accumulated on con- 
ditioned reflexes; for a bibliography see R. S. WOODWORTH, 
Experimental Psychology (New York, 1938). Critical work 
concerning this concept will be found in the article by KARL 
ZENER, "The Significance of Behavior Accompanying Conditioned 
Salivary Secretion for Theories of the Conditioned Response," 
American Journal of Psychology, vol. L, 1937, and in H. S. 
LIDDELL, "The Conditioned Reflex," in Comparative Reflexology 
(New York, 1934) and KURT GOLDSTEIN, The Organism, p. 175 



248 NOTES 

12. See, on the subject, KURT KOFFKA, The Growth of the Mind 
(London, 1928-), and GOLDSTEIN, The Organism, chap. IX, pp. 
157 . 

13. In addition to the references in note 12, see WILLIAM 
McDoucALL, Introduction to Social Psychology (London, 1908) 
and Psychoanalysis and Social Psychology (London, 1935). 

14. WOODWORTH, Dynamic Psychology (New York, 1926). 
13. ALLPORT, Personality, A Psychological Interpretation. 

CHAPTER VI 

1. See WILLIAM STERN, Psychology of Early Childhood (New 
York, 1930) ; KURT KOFFKA, The Growth of the Mind (New York, 
1925) ; G. E. COGIIILL, Anatomy and the Problem of Behavior 
(New York, 1929) ; MAX MINKOWSKI, "Sur les mouvements," etc., 
Revue neurologique, vol. XXXVII, 1921, pp. 1105-18, 1235-50, 
and "Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte," etc., Archiv fur Neurologic 
und Psychiatric, vol. XIII, 1923, p. 475; LEONARD CARMICHAEL, 
"The Development of Behavior," Psychological Review, vol. 
XXXIII, 1926; N. L. MUNN, Psychological Development (New 
York, 1938); KURT GOLDSTEIN, The Organism (New York, 1939), 
chap. IX. 

2. See SIGMUND FREUD, Collected Papers (London, 1934). 

3. KAREN HORNBY, New Ways in Psychoanalysis (New York, 
1939). See also GOLDSTEIN, The Organism, chap. IX, and MARTIN 
SCHEERER, Die Lehre von der Gestalt (Berlin, 1931). 

4. The problem of sex needs particular consideration which it 
will find in a special presentation. 

5. KURT GOLDSTEIN, "The Idea of Disease and Therapy," 
Review of Religion, March 1949. 

CHAPTER VII 

1. On preferred behavior, see KURT GOLDSTEIN, "Zum Problem 
der Tendenz zum ausgezeichneten Verhalten," Deutsche Zeitschrift 
fur Nervenheilkunde, vol. CVII, 1929. 

2. See WERTHEIMER, "Untersuchungen zur Lehre von der 
Gestalt," Zeitschrift fur Psychologic, vol. LXI, 1912 (translated in 
W. D. ELLIS, Source Book of Gestalt Psychology, New York, 
1938, lectures II, V). 

3. See ERNST KRETSCHMER, Korperbau und Charakter (Berlin, 
1918). 

4. See FRANZ BOAS, The Mind of Primitive Men (New York, 
1911), and OTTO KLINEBERG, Race Differences (New York, 1935). 



NOTES 249 

CHAPTER VIII 

1. WILLIAM McDouGALL, Introduction to Social Psychology 
(London, 1908). 

2. See JOHN DOLLARD and others, Frustration and Aggression 
(New Haven, 1939). 

3. See ELLIS FREEMAN, Social Psychology (New York, 1936). 

4. ERNST CASSIRER, Philosophic der symbolischen Formen 
(Berlin, 1929). 

5. On customs see RUTH BENEDICT, Patterns of Culture (New 
York, 1934), and MARGARET MEAD, Sex and Temperament in Three 
Primitive Societies (New York, 1935). 

CHAPTER IX 

1. fiTiENNE GILSON, The Unity of Philosophical Experience 
(New York, 1937). 

2. HORKHEIMER, MAX, "Montaigne und die Function der Skep- 
sis," Deutsche Zeitschrift fur Sozialforschung, vol. VII, 1938, 
pp. i ff. 

3. See HERBERT MARCUSE, "Zur Kritik des Hedonismus," 
Deutsche Zeitschrift fur Soztalforschung, vol. Ill, 1938, pp. 55 ff. 

4. KURT GOLDSTEIN, "Bemerkungen iiber die Bedeutung der 
Biologic fur Soziologie," in Studlen uber Autoritat und Familie 
(Paris, 1936), ed Max Horkheimer, p. 656. 

5. See ROBERT ULICH, Fundamentals of Democratic Education 
(New York, 1940). 



INDEX 



INDEX 



Actualization, tendency toward, 
H2, 139 

Abstract behavior, lack of in 
patients, 42 ff. 

Abstract attitude, 59; and cus- 
toms and institutions, 217; 
and choice, 49 ; and democ- 
racy, 118; and emotional and 
social behavior, 55 ; and fear, 
94; and memory, 51 ; and sci- 
ence, 234; and space and time 
perception, 46 ff. ; and speech, 
68; and shifting, 53; and vol- 
untary actions, 53 ; and condi- 
tioned reflexes, 137 

Adaptation, 89; to a defect, 
38, 96 

Adequacy, 182 

Adequate stimulation, 88 

Adequate milieu, 89 

After-effect, 153; abnormal, and 
isolation, 156 

Allport, Gordon W., 128, 149, 
173, 241, 246, 247, 248 

Alternation reactions, 17 

Ambivalence, 17, 161, 207 

Amnesic aphasia, 2 

Analytic method, 9 ff., 231; 
danger of, 231 

Anthropology, 9 

Anthropomorphism, 132 

Anxiety, 91 ; and fear, 92 ; and 
abnormal activity, 99 ; and 
consciousness, 94; and child- 



hood, 110; and nothingness, 
92; and orderliness, 96; and 
originality, 113; and insanity, 
116; and culture, in; and 
the unsolvable task, 90; and 
social and political oiganiza- 
tion, 117; and freedom, 114; 
and fear in normal life, 109 
Anxiety, capacity of bearing, 

in 

Aristotle, 128 
Atomistic method, 3 

Bain, 190 

Beauty of life, 228 

Behavior, normal, 66; abstract 
and concrete, 59 ff. ; ordered 
and disordered, 85 ff. ; pre- 
ferred, 174 

Benedict, R., 249 

Bethe, A., 121, 246 

Biology, knowledge in, 9, 21 ff.; 
science of, 232 ; basic law of, 

15 

Biologist, 232 
Boas, 179, 248 
Bolles, M., and Goldstein, K., 

64, 245 

Brain lesion, 36 
Buehler, Carl, 74 
Burrow, Trigant, 5, 241 

Capacity of abstraction, 59, 68; 

137 



254 INDEX 

Carmichael, L., 248 

Carter, J. W , Jr., 128, 132, 247 

Cassirer, E., 27, 216, 244, 246, 
249 

Catastrophic behavior, 85 ff. 

Catastrophic situation, 57 

Chil<i, C. M., 241 

Childhood, 5, 156; and am- 
bivalence, 1 60; and isolated 
reaction, 169; events during, 
and psvchoanalysis, 163 

Coghill, G. E., 5, 121, 241, 246, 
248 

Collectivism, 212 

Comfort, 182 



Culture, and anxiety, in; vari- 
eties of, 199; and disease, 
221; and sublimation, in; 
differences of, 198 

Customs, 149, 216, 219; trans- 
mission of, 218 

Danger, condition of, 89; to the 
existence of the organism, 89 ; 
methods of escaping, 96 ff. 

Defect, awareness and unaware- 
ness of, 1 06; adaptation to, 
96 

Democracy, and anxiety, 118; 
and the abstract attitude, 118 

Dewey, J., 5, 128, 203, 246, 247 



Community, true, and masses, Dialcctic proce dure of cognition, 

118 26, 224 

Concrete and abstract behavior, Dilthcv ~ 

41, 59 ff., 72; dependence of Disease, 5 

the first on the second, 61, McDougall, W., 204, 248, 249 
82; in normal life, 64; and Dollard, J., 249 
scientific and artistic work, Drill) I35; and cond i t ioned re- 
6 3 flex, 137 

Conditioned reflexes, 133, 158; Drive, 139, 140 ff., 193, and re- 
lease of tension, 140; concept 
of different separate drives, 
142 ; and "instrumental mech- 
anisms," 147; the basic, 133, 



and development, 158; mean- 
ing in man, 137; dependence 
on abstract attitude, 137 

Conflict, 164, 169 

Consciousness, 151 ff., 167 

Consistency, 174 

Constant reaction, 122 

Constants of individuality, 184, 
187; and experience, 193 

Contact, social, 202 

Courage, 113 



142 

Education and educator, 233 
Ego, 1 66 

Ellis, W. D., 244, 248 
Emptiness, the experience of, 
1 06 



Creative power, lack of in pa- Encroachment, 204, 207 



tients, in, 1 68 
Creative work, 63 



Enjoyment of life, 228 
Enlightenment, 197 



INDEX 



255 



Entelechy, 128 
Equality and freedom, 213 
Equalization process, 15 
Erkenntnisgrund, 24 
Essence (Wesen) of the organ- 
ism, 26 
Exclusion of defects, 106 

Factor analysis, 192 

Facts in biology, 22 

Faculty psychology, 145 

Fear, 92 ; and the abstract atti- 
tude, 94 

Figure and ground, 12, 19; and 
constancy, 20 

Free-association theory, 161, 166 

Freedom, 113, 204, 208, 213, 
238; and anxiety, 114 

Freeman, E., 249 

Freud, S , 165 ff., 227, 246, 248 

Freud's theory, cpistemological 
basis of, 165 

Frontal lobe, 350 

Frustration without resentment, 
207 

Gelb, A,, 244, 245 
Gellermann, L. W., 247 
Goethe, J. W., 24 
Gestalt, 23, 29; and good and 

preferred behavior, 186 
Ge stall, psychology, 5, 128, 181 
Qilson, E., 226, 249 
Goldstein, K., 241, 243, 244, 245, 

246, 247, 248, 249 
Groups, habits of, 149 

Habits, 135, 149, 216, 219 
Harrower, M., 243, 244 
Hanfmann and Kasanin, 245, 246 
Happiness, 288 
Head, H., 244, 245 



Hedonism, 247 

Herrick, C. J., 5, 121, 241, 246 

Hoffmann, P , and Kretschmer, 

E., 247 

Horkheimer, M., 227, 249 
Horney, Karen, 164, 246, 248 
Horror vacui, 104 
Hull, C. L., 130, 247 9 

Human nature, 67 ff , 172 ; holis- 
tic approach to, 9 ; science of, 
9; creative trend of, in, 168; 
and conditioning, 135; and 
skepticism and hedonism, 229 
Human and animal, 7, 83 



Individual, in true community 
and masses, 118; potentiali- 
ties of, 172; variability of, 
194, 198; and surrounding 
world of, 205; and species, 
210; and the "we," 211; and 
society, 214; and the others, 
201 ; rights of, 212 

Individuality and the temporal 
course of processes, 186 

Infancy, 157 

Instincts, 138 

Institutions, 7, 219 

Isolation of functions, % io; and 
pathology, 16, 18; and ab- 
normal after-effect, 156; and 
childhood, 160; and the social 
problem, 225; and skepticism 
and hedonism, 227 

I.Q., 215 

Justice, 236 

James, William, 4, 32, 244 

Kant, I., vi 

Kantor, I. R., 128, 132, 247 

Kierkegaard, S0ren, 113, 246 



256 INDEX 



Klineberg, 197, 215, 248 
Klucver, H, 128, 246, 247 
Knowledge, in biology, 9, 21 ff. ; 

in biology and physics, 29 
Koffka, K., 246, 247, 248 
Kretschmer, E., 248 

Lability, 19 

Language, see Speech 

Lashlcy, K. S, 5, 121, 128, 132, 
241, 244, 246 

Liddcll, H S., 247 

Life, disintegration of, 3 , al- 
ways positive, 25, 210, 226; 
enjoyment of, 228, decay of, 
141 

Localization in the brain cor- 
tex, 37 

Man, nature of, 6 See (ilso 
Human nature 

Mann, Thomas, 108 

May, Rollo, 246 

Masses and anxiety, 117 

Mead, Margaret, 249 

Meaning of words, 79 

Meyer, Adolph, 5, 241 

Mechanisms, development of, 
148; and impulse toward ac- 
tion, 148; instrumental, 147 

Milieu and individual, 196 

Minkowski, M , 248 

Monakow, K., and Mourgue, R , 
244 

Morals, 236 

Muenzinger, K. F , 247 

Munn, N. L., 248 

Murphy, G , 215 

Nadel, A., 245 



Names, character of, 77 ff. 
Natural, 182, 212 
Nature, kindness of, 108; in- 
terest in the individual, 209 
Needs, 149 
Normal and pathological life, 

37 

Neurosis, 100, 169, 205 
Nervous system, 1 1 

Order and disorder, 85 ff , 102 

Ordered behavior and con- 
stancy, 184 

Orderliness, and anxiety, 96 ; 
excessive, as pathological phe- 
nomenon, 101 

Organism, knowledge of, 21, 22 
ff ; presupposition of its ex- 
istence, 89 

Pathology, 15, 34 
Pavlov, J. P , 247 
People and masses, 117 
Perfection, urge to, 147 
Perry, B., 4, 32, 244 
Personality, change in brain 

lesions, 38; organization of, 

120, 171 ff. 
Physical science, 232 
Physician, 233 
Plato, 190 

Pleasure principle, 227 
Pleasure of tension, 228 
Preferred behavior, 174; and 

environment, 196, 200; and 

ordered behavior, 186 
Preferred perceptions, 180 
Preferred positions, 175 
Primitive people, 236 



INDEX 



257 



Primitive reaction, 18 
Prinzhorn, H., 245 
Progress, 214 
Prototype, 198 

Pseudoaggressive attitude, 208 
Pseudo-social organization, 222 
Psychoanalysis, 161, 164 ff. ; 



Skepticism, 226 

Social contact, 202 

Social contract, 211 

Social norms, 202 ; and sublima- 
tion, 202 

Social organization, 208, 223, 
230 



methodological approach of, Society and the individual? 214 



165 
Psychotherapy, 162, 168 

Race, 196 

Races and the range of variabil- 
ity, 198 

Racial prejudice, 196 

Reflex, conditioned 133, 158; 
in man and animal, 134; and 
the nature of man, 135 

Reflexes, meaning of, 133 

Reflex theory, 121 

Religion and superstition, 115 

Remembrance, 153, 158, 160 

Repression, 158, 160, 206 

Reversion of actions, 127 

Rigidity, 17 

Rothmann, Eva, 246 

Rubin, E , 19, 243 

Scheler, Max, 8, 241 
Scheercr, M , 2, 245, 248 
Schizophrenia, 64 
Science, holistic approach in, 3 ; 

nature of, 231, 234; task of, 

21 
Self-defense, 237 



Society, sick, 221 

Sorting tests, 70 

Speech, 69, 216; and abstraction, 
70 ff ; and representation, 74 ; 
of animals, 83 ; automatisms, 
82 , and real speech, 82 ff 

Specificity, 173 

Species, 210 

Stern, William, 215, 246, 248 

Stimulus, effect of, 12, 13 

Stimulus bondage, abnormal, 16 

Stimulus-response theory, 128 

Storch, A., 244 

Submission, 204 

Substitute reactions, 99, 114, 159 

Suicide, 116 

Symbols in science, 27 

Technology, 233 

Tendency to actualize oneself, 
140 

Tendency to self-restriction, 202 

Tension, release of, 140, 227 

Test methods, 188 

Therapeutic situation, 162, 168 

Threshold, change by stimula- 
tion, 14; constancy of, 15 



Self-restriction, 202, 206; with- Time, 46, 186 



out resentment, 207 
Self-sacrifice, 229 
Shifting, 53 



Tolman, E C., 129, 247 

Training, 135 

Type, 177, 185, 188, 190 



258 

Tyranny, 118, 221 



INDEX 



Ulich, R., 249 

Unconscious, 150, 165 ff. ; in 
the psychoanalytic sense, 165 
Vrbild in knowledge, 24 

Variability of individuals, 194, 

198 

Verbal possessions, 81 
Vigotski test, 64 

Warren, 128 
Weber-Fechncr law, 241 



''We," the, 208 ; and the realiza- 
tion of the individual, 211 

Weisenberg, Th., and McBride, 
C., 244, 245 

Wertheimer, M., 181, 248 

Wheeler, R H, 128 

Wilder, J. H., 243, 247 

Woodworth, R. S , 149, 200, 
247, 248 

World, organization in normal 
persons, 67; in patients, 67 

Zener, K , 247 
Zucker, K , 244